0558006251_vision_55_setup 04-06

354
Form Number 0558006251 Date: 04/06 Vision 55 CNC Setup Preliminary Operation Cutting Machine Control

Upload: cesar-leopoldo-campos-chacon

Post on 21-Jul-2016

27 views

Category:

Documents


4 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Form Number 0558006251

Date: 04/06

Vision 55 CNC

Setup

Preliminary Operation

Cutting Machine Control

Page 2: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

The equipment described in this manual is potentially hazardous. Use caution when installing, operating and maintaining this equipment.

The purchaser is solely responsible for the safe operation and use of all products purchased, including compliance with OSHA and other government standards. ESAB Cutting Systems has no liability for personal injury or other damage arising out of the use of any product manufactured or sold by ESAB. See standard ESAB terms and conditions of sale for a specific statement of ESAB’s responsibilities and limitations on its liability.

ESAB Cutting Systems is not responsible for any errors that may appear in this document. Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

This manual is ESAB Part No. 0558006251

This manual is for the convenience and use of the cutting machine purchaser. It is not a contract or other obligation on the part of ESAB Cutting Systems.

* ESAB Cutting Systems, 2006

Printed In U.S.A.

Page 3: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06
Page 4: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06
Page 5: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Table of Contents

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

3

Table of ContentsTabl eof Contents

About the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Part I Operator Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Chapter 1 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15General safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Danger warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Accident prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Emergency measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 2 Operator panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Operator panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

2.1 Control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Screen block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Input block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Station block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Traverse block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Additional panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

2.2 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39General screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Application menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Chapter 3 Basic operating philosophy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Sections of the control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Chapter 4 Operating example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Calling and executing the stored part program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Page 6: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Table of Contents

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

4

Interrupting and continuing a running part program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Calling the Help function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Finishing the work and switching off the 24 Volt Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Part II Reference Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Chapter 5 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

5.1 First steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Preparatory tasks for startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Turning on the system and 24-Volt power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

5.2 Move to reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Automatic homing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Manual reference point movement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Establish reference point without reference switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

5.3 Blank alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Manual blank alignment with three points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Automatic blank alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Manual blank alignment with two points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Chapter 6 Utilization of the machine area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Machine area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Working areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Chapter 7 Manual mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

7.1 Principles of manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Switching the coordinate display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Manual operation in 'latch' mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Manual operation in 'tip' mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Manual mode with handwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Selecting Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

7.2 Positioning motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Moving to the fix point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Move to the working area home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Move to target point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Page 7: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Table of Contents

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

5

Travel to the last program zero point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Move to the machine home point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

7.3 Blank preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Defining fix points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

7.4 Trace and teach trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

7.4.1 Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Parameter entry in trace mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

7.4.2 Teach trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Parameter entry for the teach trace mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Executing the teach trace procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Recording several closed contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Chapter 8 Providing and editing data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

8.1 File manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Structure of the file manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Renaming a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Deleting a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Creating a new file or directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Copying a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Cutting a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Pasting a file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Execution of a file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

8.2 The part program editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

8.2.1 The basics of the part program editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Structure of the part program editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Part programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Formats of part programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

8.2.2 The functions of the part program editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Finding characters in program code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Replacing of characters in the program code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Copying and pasting program code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Cutting and pasting program code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Line-by-line navigation in program code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Deleting lines in program code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Page 8: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Table of Contents

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

6

Enlargement of segments in the graphical display of part programs . . . . . . . . . . . 180Saving part programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

8.3 Technology data display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Structure of the technology data display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Loading a technology record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Changing a technology parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Save changed technology record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

8.4 On-screen Timers and Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Resetting a counter/timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Setting a new limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Chapter 9 Prepare and execute part programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

9.1 Fundamentals of automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Switching the program display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

9.2 Program preparation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Overview of the part program parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Enter parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Select program options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Define strap bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

9.3 Program execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Open part program in the automatic section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Produce strap bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

9.4 Interrupting/continuing part programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Reverse processing direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Chapter 10 Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

10.1 Generally available functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Automatic torch height control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Creep speed for height control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Startup all stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

10.2 Carriage clamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Clamping statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Manual clamping of a carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

10.3 Oxy fuel process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Page 9: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Table of Contents

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

7

Functions in the main view of the oxy fuel process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22410.4 Plasma process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Functions in the main view of the plasma process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Appendix A Symbols of the function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

A.1 Symbols in the data section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233File manager (view identification 1000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Dateimanager - Festprogramm-Verzeichnis (Ansichtskennung 1001). . . . . . . . . . 236Dateimanager - Technologieverzeichnis (Ansichtskennung 1002) . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Dateimanager - Jobverzeichnis (Ansichtskennung 1003) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Cutting program editor (view identification 1200). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Standard shape processing (view identification 1400). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

A.2 Symbols in the automatic section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Basic view of the automatic mode section (view identification 2000). . . . . . . . . . . 243Switching of the coordinate displays (view identification 2100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Moving a program (view identification 11000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Switching of the coordinate displays (view identification 11100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247"Jogging the contour" (view identification 11300). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Positioning the machine with the handwheel (view identification 11360). . . . . . . . 249Options (view identification 201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250(View identification 11700). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Multi-Level-Return to Start (View identification 11800) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

A.3 Symbols in the manual mode section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Basic view of the manual section (view identification 3000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Coordinate display (view identification 3100). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Positioning motions in manual mode (view identification 3200). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Positioning the machine with the handwheel (view identification 3260). . . . . . . . . 257Homing procedure (view identification 3400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Blank preparation in manual mode (view identification 3500) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Manual blank alignment (view identification 3510). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Positioning with handwheel (view identification 3516) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Definition of the fix points (view identification 3520). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Trace/Teach Trace (view identification 3600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Trace (view identification 3610) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Teach Trace (view identification 3620) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

A.4 Symbols in the options section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Page 10: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Table of Contents

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

8

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Option entry (view identification 4000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Machine-related options (view identification 4100). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Controller-related options (view identification 4200). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269DDE-related options (view identification 4300). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

A.5 Symbols in the carriage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Basic view of carriage (view identification 5000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Carriage clamping (view identification 5100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

A.6 Symbols in the process section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Basic view of the process section (view identification 30000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Basic view of the plasma process (view identification 30001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Basic view of the oxy fuel process (view identification 30002). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

A.7 Symbols in the technology data section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Parameter view of the technology data (view identification 9000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

A.8 Symbols in the startup section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Basic view of the startup section (View identification 6000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Constant editor (View identification 6100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Appendix B Status and error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

B.1 Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Status messages 2001 - 2009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Status messages 2010 - 2019 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

B.2 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Error messages 3001 - 3008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Error messages 3009 - 3029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Error messages 3031 - 3048 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Error messages 3049 - 3058 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Error messages 3059 - 3092 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Error messages 3093 - 3102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Error messages 3103 - 3113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Error messages 3114 - 3128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Error messages 3129 - 3200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Error messages 3201 - 3304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Error messages 3305 - 3390 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Error messages 3391 - 3404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Error messages 3405 - 3418 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Error messages 3419 - 3510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Page 11: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Table of Contents

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

9

Error messages 3511 - 3570 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Error messages 3571 - 3604 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Error messages 3605 - 3707 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Error messages 3708 - 3721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

Page 12: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Table of Contents

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

10

Page 13: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

About the document

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

11

About the documentAbout thedocument 89.01.005500000.400.388- GBOperating instructions - Preliminary i nfor mationVISION55

At a Glance

Document Scope This document describes how to use the computerized numeric control VISION 55, and is intended exclusively as preliminary information. Not all of the functions that will be included in the delivered version of the control are described.

Validity Note This document is a preliminary version for the control VISION 55, Version 1.18.x.x. and lat-er.

Revision History

Related Documents

Product Related Warn-ings

Accomplish only operations, which are described in this operating instructions. Read and observe in particular the industrial safety notes in the chapter Safety (See Safety, p. 15)as well as the specific safety instructions Attention, Danger and Warning in the text, indi-cated by symbols.

User Comments We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at [email protected].

Rev. No. Changes

2 Preliminary version

Title of Documentation Reference Number

VISION 55 Service Manual 89.03.0055xx

Page 14: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

About the document

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

12

Page 15: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operator Manual

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

13

II

I Operator ManualOperatorManualI 89.01.005500000.400.388- GBOperating instructions- Pr eliminaryi nformationVISION55

Overview

Introduction The Operator Manual familiarizes you with the safety instructions, the elements and the fundamental operating philosophy of the control.Everything that goes beyond the Operator Manual and is necessary for operating the con-trol can be found in the subsequent part of the operating instructions, the Reference Man-ual.

What’s in this part? This Part contains the following Chapters:

Chapter Chaptername Page

1 Safety 15

2 Operator panel 23

3 Basic operating philosophy 49

4 Operating example 63

Page 16: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator Manual

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

14

I

Page 17: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Safety

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

15

11

1 SafetySafety189.01.005500000.400.388- GBOperating instructions- Pr eliminaryi nformationVISION55

Overview

Introduction This chapter is about the safety instructions and the safety notes you have to ob-serve in conjunction with the control

Two types of safety instructions can be distinguished:General safety instructions

Specific safety instructions

The following chapters contain the general safety instructions.

General safety instruc-tions

The general safety instructions will help you to protect yourself, your colleagues, the ma-chine and the workpieces from damage.

The general safety instructions are divided into the following topics:Basic safety instructions

Safety notes

Accident prevention

Emergency measures

Malfunctions

Specific safety instruc-tions

Apart from the general safety instructions listed in this chapter, please also observe the specific safety instructions. The specific safety instructions are identified by symbols and are located in the respective places in the text.

continued on the next page

CAUTION

Reason for the safety instruction

Danger explanation

Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment dam-age.

Page 18: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Safety

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

16

1

Overview, continued

Specific safety instructions, continued

Knowledge about the safety instructions

It is very important to hand a copy of these safety instructions to the operating staff. Knowl-edge about the safety instructions is absolutely necessary.

If you have any ques-tions

Immediately consult the safety officer, if you have any questions after reading the safety instructions.

What’s in this Chapter? This Chapter contains the following Maps:

DANGER

Reason for the safety instruction

Danger explanation

Failure to observe this precaution can result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

Reason for the safety instruction

Danger explanation

Failure to observe this precaution can result in severe injury or equipment damage.

Topic Page

General safety precautions 17

Danger warnings 18

Accident prevention 19

Emergency measures 20

Malfunctions 21

Page 19: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Safety

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

17

1

General safety precautions

Purpose Following the basic safety precautions enables you to better judge and avoid gener-ally dangerous situations in your daily work routine.

Knowledge of the ma-chine

The safe operation of the control requires the knowledge of the operating instructions sup-plied with the flame-cutting machine. It is absolutely necessary to instruct the operating personnel.

Safety regulations and guidelines

All valid safety regulations and guidelines for the "Electrical Equipment" of machines andauxiliary devices as well as operational devices, must generally be followed.

Use of the control The control is an integral component of a machine and may only be used for that machine.

Admissible applica-tions

Only the applications expressively permitted in the operating instructions for the machine, are allowed.

Environmental condi-tions

The admissible environmental conditions for the operation of the control must be taken from the corresponding Machine manual.

Modification of the con-trol

Arbitrary conversions or modifications of the control must not be performed due to safety reasons.

Page 20: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Safety

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

18

1

Danger warnings

Purpose The observation of the danger warnings will help you to avoid possible dangers which may occur during the work with the control.

Startup When starting up the control and the machine, as well as the additional devices, observe the specified supply voltage. Pay special attention to the connection of the protective con-ductor!

Inspection and repair works

Have inspection and repair works at the control only done by expert qualified personnel!

Spare parts Only use original spare parts for the electrical equipment of the control!

Further danger warn-ings

It is very important to observe the danger warnings in the Machine manual!

Page 21: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Safety

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

19

1

Accident prevention

Purpose The observance of the accident prevention measures will help you to avoid acci-dents which may occur due to improper handling of the control.

Opening the control Always keep the front door of the control closed in order to avoid dust contamination and in order to protect the operating staff against the accidental touch of electric equipment. The control may only be opened by qualified personnel. Safety devices must not be mod-ified. Fuses must not be bridged, neither may their properties be changed.

Grounded measuring equipment

When working with grounded measuring equipment, e. g. an oscilloscope, always take care that the grounding jack of the measuring device is connected to the grounding point of the control (measuring cable). If necessary, use isolation amplifiers for ungrounded mea-surements.

Works under voltage Be extremely careful when working under voltage, e. g. during inspection and adjustment work! If necessary, order an assistant to stand in the vicinity of the main switch on the ma-chine, so that he or she may immediately switch off the voltage in case of emergency.

Electrical setup If possible, perform works at the electrical setup only with the machine completely switched off. During this, secure the main switch against unauthorised operation (e. g. with a pad-lock).

Switching off the sys-tem

Switch off the main switch of the machine as well as of the additional devices at finishingtime or in case of longer interruptions of work.

Damage Immediately switch off the main switch of the machine, if cables, plugged connections or electrical devices are damaged. The defective parts must be repaired by expert personnel.

Boards and plugged connections

Board assemblies or plugged connections may only be pulled out when switched off. Do not mix up board assemblies or plugged connections and observe the labelling or coding. In case of doubt consult the documentation.

Further regulations Please observe the following regulations, too:Connection requirements of the respective energy supply companies

Safety regulations of the OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration)

Safety regulations of the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission)

Accident prevention regulations of the respective country

Accident prevention regulations in the machine manual.

Page 22: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Safety

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

20

1

Emergency measures

Purpose Following the emergency measures helps you to behave appropriately in cases of emergency and thus avoid damages or reduce them to a minimum.

EMERGENCY POWER OFF

It is absolutely necessary to observe the regulations of the machine manufacturer! In case of emergencies, immediately activate the 'EMERGENCY POWER OFF' pushbut-ton on the operator panel of the control (see Machine manual).

Fire of the control Extinguish fires of the control only with carbon dioxide (CO2) or with appropriate powder extinguishers!

Page 23: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Safety

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

21

1

Malfunctions

Purpose The measures described here illustrate how to deal properly with malfunctions of the control.

Elimination of malfunc-tions

Malfunctions must only be eliminated by persons trained and authorised for this.

Malfunction with error message

In case of malfunctions generating an error message, please follow the measures stated for eliminating the malfunction.

Malfunction without er-ror message

Switch off the machine immediately in case of malfunctions which do not generate an error message. Inform the service department and wait for their instructions.Do not try to elimate the malfunction by yourself!

Page 24: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Safety

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

22

1

Page 25: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operator panel

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

23

22

2 Operator panelOperatorpanel289.01.005500000. 400.388-GBOperatingi nstr uct ions-Prelimi nar yinformati onVISI ON 55

Operator panel overview

Introduction The operator panel of the control is explained in this chapter. This comprises the display and all control elements (keys, handwheel etc.) the operator can access on the front side of the control.

Case versions The control is delivered either in the standard case or in the "Plus" case. The "Plus" case is higher than the standard version and can be equipped with an additional panel with ad-ditional control elements below the regular operator panel, depending on the respective configuration.

The operator panel The graphic shows the operator panel of the control:

continued on the next page

Page 26: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

24

2

Operator panel overview, continued

Operator panel ele-ments

The table designates the elements of the operator panel:

What’s in this Chapter? This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Number Designation

1 Screen

2 Screen block

3 Station block

4 EMERGENCY POWER OFF pushbutton

5 Input block

6 Traverse block

7 Additional panel

Section Topic Page

2.1 Control elements 26

2.2 Screen 39

Page 27: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

25

2

Page 28: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

26

2

2.1 Control elements

Overview

Introduction This section describes the individual control elements of the control.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Screen block 27

Input block 29

Station block 33

Traverse block 35

Additional panel 37

Page 29: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

27

2

Screen block

Introduction By means of the keys of the screen block you can browse through the individual views, function menus and sections of the control.

The screen block The graphic shows the elements of the screen block:

Elements of the screen block

The table designates the elements of the screen block:

Level back key The "Level back" key switches back by one view or by one function menu level, respective-ly. This may be continued until the basic view or the basic function menu is reached.

Function keys The eight function keys "F1" - "F8" serve for the control of the function menus. By pressing a function key, you can call a function or a function submenu.

continued on the next page

Number Designation

1 'Level back' key

2 Function keys

3 'Extended function menu' key

4 Screen

5 Section keys

Page 30: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

28

2

Screen block, continued

Function keys, continuedThe symbols or texts above the keys show you which functions the individual keys have in the current function menu. Empty symbol or text fields on the screen mean that the respec-tive keys do not have any function in the corresponding view.

Extended menu key An arrow to the right of the row of function symbols on the screen indicates that more thaneight functions are available simultaneously in a function menu. In this case, you may change over to further functions with the "Extended function menu" key. If you press the "Extended function menu" key again, you will return to the previous function menu.

Section keys The seven section keys "P1" - "P7" change between the main sections of the operating sys-tem. You may always change between the individual sections without having to terminate se-lected functions. If a change is impossible without terminating the function first, a corre-sponding message is displayed on the screen.Some of the section keys have a double assignment with 'Shift + <section key>'. This al-lows you to access further sections (See Sections of the control operation, p. 50).

Note: If more than two function menus are available, you can change over to the respec-tive next function menu by pressing the 'Extended function menu' key again. After the last function menu, the first function menu is displayed again.

Page 31: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

29

2

Input block

Introduction The input block is used for all kinds of textual or numeric entries into the control.

The input block The graphic shows the elements of the input block:

Elements of the input block

The table designates the elements of the input block:

continued on the next page

Number Designation

1 Alphanumerical block

2 'Shift' key

3 Cursor keys

4 EMERGENCY POWER OFF pushbutton

5 not used

6 'Help' key

7 'Del' key

8 'Ins' key

9 Backspace key

Page 32: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

30

2

Input block, continued

Elements of the input block, continued

Alphanumeric block The alphanumeric block comprises the keys for entering letters, numbers and special char-acters. By simultaneously pressing the 'Shift' key and a numeric key the second assignment of the numeric key is activated. In order to activate the third assignment you have to press the respective numeric key twice while pressing the 'Shift' key, and three times for the fourth assignment.

'Shift' key The 'Shift' key of the control in combinaton with other keys enables activation of multiple key assignments, such as access to further sections of control operation in combination with the section keys P1 - P7, activation of the multiple key assignments of the alphanu-meric block or switching on 24 Volt Power in combination with the RUN key. When pressing the "Shift" key without simultaneously pressing another key, the double assignments of the section keys are displayed on the screen.

Cursor keys The cursor keys move the cursor or the focus to the right, to the left, upwards or down-wards. Furthermore, they define whether the cursor is moved with the help of the hand-wheel (See Handwheel, p. 32) in vertical or horizontal direction.

EMERGENCY POWER OFF pushbutton

Activating the EMERGENCY POWER OFF pushbutton interrupts the 24 Volt power.

continued on the next page

Number Designation

10 'Tab' key

11 'Alt' key

12 'Ctrl' key

13 Enter key

14 Handwheel

Note: You can set the maximum permissible time interval between multiple pressing of the key in the system settings of the 'Options' section.

Page 33: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

31

2

Input block, continued

EMERGENCY POWER OFF pushbutton, continued

'Help' key The 'Help' key is used to call the help file of the control Calling the Help function, p. 72.

'Del' key The "Del" key deletes the entry to the right of the cursor.

Key 'Ins' The "Ins" key activates and deactivates the overwrite mode. If the overwrite mode is acti-vated, entries are not inserted between the existing characters, they overwrite these in-stead.

Backspace key The backspace key deletes the character to the left of the cursor.

'Tab' key Within the form view, you can jump from one text box to the next in sequence by pressing the 'Tab' key. By pressing the key combination 'Shift'+'Tab' you can jump in the opposite direction.In case of separated windows, the key combination 'Ctrl'+'Tab' allows to change betweenthe separated windows.

'Alt' key The 'Alt' key in combination with other keys enables activation of double key assignments. For this, press both keys simultaneously, if this is stated in the operating instructions. For example, use the key combination 'Alt' + '1'-'7' in order to open the seven application menus at the top of the screen.

'Ctrl' key The 'Ctrl' key can be used to activate further functions of a key. For this, press both keys simultaneously, if this is stated in the operating instructions.

Enter key The enter key allows you to confirm an action.

continued on the next page

DANGER

The exact effect of the EMERGENCY POWER OFF pushbutton depends on the connected machine and cannot be specified here.

It is very important to read the instructions in the machine manual!

Failure to observe this precaution can result in death or serious injury.

Page 34: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

32

2

Input block, continued

Handwheel In addition to the cursor keys and the "Tab" key, the handwheel can be used to position entries faster. The movement direction via the handwheel depends on the cursor key last pressed. This means that the cursor keys "Left" or "Right" must have been pressed in order to be able to use the handwheel in a line. If the handwheel is now turned to the right, the cursor moves to the right; is it turned to the left, the cursor moves to the left. The cursor key "Up" or "Down" must have been pressed for movements over several lines. A turn to the right moves the cursor downwards, a turn to the left moves the cursor upwards.To switch between two boxes or the tree view and the list view using the handwheel, it is necessary to first press the 'Tab' key.The current mode is displayed in the status bar:

In some special cases, the handwheel is used for movement functions. This movementfunction is then linked to the selected menu.

Page 35: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

33

2

Station block

Introduction The station block unites keys for the operation of stations and the process as well as keys for the activation of special functions.

Operating elements of the station block

The graphic shows the operating elements of the station block:

Elements of the station block

The table designates the elements of the station block:

continued on the next page

CAUTION

The functions activated by the keys of the station block may differ from machine to machine. Therefore, only the standard assignment can be de-scribed here.

Check with your Machine manual whether the functions described here match to those on your machine.

Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment dam-age.

Number Designation

1 'Shift' key

2 Station keys

3 'Master up' key

4 'Heating off/Plasma off' key

5 'Heating on/Plasma on' key

6 'Cutting oxygen on' key

7 'Select' key

8 'Height control on' key

9 'Technology records' key

10 not used/special key

11 not used/special key

Page 36: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

34

2

Station block, continued

'Shift' key The "Shift" key of the control in combinaton with other keys enables activation of multiple key assignments, such as access to further sections of control operation in combination with the section keys "P1" - "P7" or switching on 24 Volt Power in combination with the RUN key. When pressing the "Shift" key without simultaneously pressing another key, the dou-ble assignments of the section keys are displayed on the screen.

Station keys The station keys have the function to lift or lower down the respective stations. If the "Se-lect" key is pressed simultaneously, it is possible to select and deselect the stations with the station keys.

'Master up' key The "Master up" key is used to move all stations maximally to the limit as long as the key is pressed.

'Heating off/Plasma off' key

The "Heating off/ Plasma off" key switches the oxy-fuel process or the plasma process on or off depending on the process selected.

'Heating on/Plasma on' key

The "Heating on/ Plasma on" key switches on the preheat fllame of the oxy-fuel process or the plasma process depending on the process selected.

'Cutting oxygen on' The key "Cutting oxygen on" switches on the cutting oxygen of the oxy-fuel process.

'Select' key The "Select" key has the function to allow the selection and deselection of the stations with the station keys. In order to select or deselect the stations, the "Select" key must be pressed continuously.

'Technology records' key

The 'Technology records' key is used to reload process-dependent values depending on the content of the technology record (See Loading a technology record , p. 185).

Special keys Depending on the machine type, the special keys can be used to activate specific or com-plex functions; these functions can be activated by a single strike of a key. Learn from the Machine manual which functions are assigned to the special keys.

Page 37: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

35

2

Traverse block

Introduction The operating elements of the traverse block serve for the control of the machine move-ment. They are active in all situations, independent from the section displayed.

The traverse block The graphic shows the elements of the traverse block:

Elements of the traverse block

The table designates the elements of the traverse block:

Feed potentiometer The feed potentiometer has effect on all movements in manual and in automatic mode. It allows a percental increase or decrease of the currently used speed.

'Rapid' key The "Rapid" key switches from the slower creep speed to the faster rapid traverse speed, and vice versa. If the "Rapid" key is activated, the lamp above the key lights up. This func-tion can be used during manual mode with the joystick, and optionally for positioning mo-tions.

Joystick In manual mode or in case of a program interruption, the joystick allows a movement in any direction.

continued on the next page

Number Designation

1 'Rapid' key

2 Joystick

3 'RUN' key

4 Feed potentiometer

5 'STOP' key

Page 38: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

36

2

Traverse block, continued

'RUN' key The "RUN" key allows to start the automatic program sequence or to resume it after an in-terruption. Furthermore, positioning motions, working area changes and different set-up functions are activated by the "RUN" key. For all these functions, the symbol field of the function key flashes after the selection and can then be activated with the "RUN" key.In the manual operating mode 'Latch', the movement of the motor carriage is started with the 'RUN' key.

'STOP' key With the "STOP" key, a running working procedure can be interrupted.In manual operating mode, the movement of the motor carriage is stopped with the "STOP" key.

Page 39: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

37

2

Additional panel

Introduction Two different cases are available for the control. In contrast to the standard case the "Plus" case is equipped with an additional panel in the lower part of the operator panel.

Control elements of the additional panel

The graphic shows an example of the additional panel:

Elements of the station block

The table designates the elements of the given example of an additional panel:

continued on the next page

Note: This additional panel is either equipped with further station and special keys, as de-scribed here, or has been designed specially for the respective machine.

CAUTION

The functions activated by the control elements of the additional panel may differ from machine to machine. The given description is only an ex-ample.

Please check on the basis of the Machine manual which functions of the ma-chine are activated by the control elements.

Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment dam-age.

Number Designation

1 not used/special key

2 'Select' key

3 Station keys

4 not used/special keys

5 not used/special keys

Page 40: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

38

2

Additional panel, continued

Station keys The station keys have the function to lift or lower down the respective stations. If the "Se-lect" key is pressed simultaneously, it is possible to select and deselect the stations with the station keys.

'Select' key The "Select" key has the function to allow the selection and deselection of the stations with the station keys. In order to select or deselect the stations, the "Select" key must be pressed continuously.

Special keys Depending on the machine type, the special keys can be used to activate specific or com-plex functions; these functions can be activated by a single strike of a key. Learn from the Machine manual which functions are assigned to the special keys.

Page 41: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

39

2

2.2 Screen

Overview

Introduction This section describes the structure of the screen.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

General screen description 40

Application menu bar 44

Page 42: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

40

2

General screen description

Introduction The screen is divided into basic elements. These elements are used as well for operation, navigation and display of function-dependent and section-dependent contents as for the display of different states of the control resp. the machine.

The graphic shows the elements of the screen:

The table designates the elements of the screen:

continued on the next page

Number Description

1 Application menu bar

2 Navigation display

3 Main display

4 Function menu

5 Status bar

6 Set speed display

7 RUN/STOP display

8 Direction indicator

9 Current speed display

10 Section menu

Page 43: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

41

2

General screen description, continued

Application menu bar The application menu bar contains seven different application menus to be used with the key "Alt" and the numeric keys of the input block.

Navigation display The navigation display informs the operator about the position of the operating structurecurrently displayed on screen. The first symbol from the left always indicates the section currently displayed on screen (Process, Manual, etc.). Right from these follow the symbols of the functions used to nav-igate to the current screen display. So, if a function key is pressed which branches to a function submenu, this symbol is added to the navigation display. By this, the operator can always see the sequence of function levels through which he or she navigated to the current active function.

Main display The main information of a view is displayed in the main display.

Function menu The function menu includes the symbols "Level back" and "Extended function menu" as well as eight symbol fields with variable allocations. The eight variable symbol fields are assigned to the function keys "F1" - "F8" and indicate the individual current function of these. Empty symbol fields on the screen mean that the corresponding function keys are not assigned in this view and thus cannot be used.In case of functions which do not effect a further branching to a function submenu, but in-stead activate a command, the symbol usually displays the state of the function. A symbol in a coloured symbol field indicates an active function, a symbol in a grey symbol field in-dicates a function that is available but not active. A flashing symbol field indicates an acti-vated function that has to be triggered by pressing the "RUN" key. The symbol field of such an activated function that has been triggered is afterwards displayed coloured.The symbols in the function menu can alternatively be displayed as text. With the key combination 'Alt' + <function key> it is possible to display a ToolTip for the individual function keys, which briefly describes the corresponding functions.For better orientation the background of the whole function menu is displayed in the colour of the currently selected section.

Status bar The status bar at the lower border of the screen contains general information as e. g. whether the 24 Volt Power is switched on, whether the overwrite mode is active, etc.

Explanation of the symbols in the status bar

continued on the next page

Symbol Significance

The 24 Volt Power is switched off.

Page 44: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

42

2

General screen description, continued

Status bar, continued

Display of the set speed The set speed display indicates the speed, which is to be driven due to the machine con-stants, the program data or the technology data.

RUN/STOP display The RUN/STOP display indicates whether the machine is currently moving or not. If the machine moves, the RUN symbol is displayed. It the machine is at a standstill, the STOP symbol is displayed.

Direction indicator The direction indicator shows in which direction the tool is currently moving resp. in which direction it will be moving when startet.

Display of the current speed

The current speed display indicates the speed of the machine, which is actually driven. All influences, which cause a change of speed, are considered in this display.

continued on the next page

Symbol Significance

The 24 Volt Power is switched on.

The service mode is switched off.

The service mode is switched on.

The homing procedure has not been performed.

The homing procedure has been performed.

The operation control (OC) does not have connection to the machine control (MC).

The connection between the OC and the MC is faulty, some signals have not been answered.

The connection between the OC and the MC has broken down, the connec-tion is trying to be restored.

The operation control (OC) does have connection to the machine control (MC).

Page 45: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

43

2

General screen description, continued

Section menu The section menu consists of seven symbol fields and shows the current allocation of the section keys "P1" - "P7". The key combination 'Shift' + <section key> may activate double allocations.The operator may always change to the display of another section by pressing a section key.The symbols in the section menu can alternatively be displayed as text.Sections of the control operation, p. 50

Page 46: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

44

2

Application menu bar

Introduction The menu bar of the control application is displayed in the upper part of the screen. This menu bar includes seven different application menus described as follows.

The application menu bar:

Menu operation The operation menus are opened and operated with the keys "Alt" and the keys of the input block. In order to open a menu or a menu item you must press the key combination 'Alt' + <underlined character>, e. g. 'Alt' + '1', in order to open the menu 'File'.

1-File The table describes the menu items of the application menu '1-File'.

2-Edit The table describes the menu items of the application menu '2-Edit'.

3-Section The table describes the menu entries of the application menu '3-Section'.

continued on the next page

Menu item Description

1-Close The menu item 'Exit' is deactivated for reasons of safety.

Menu item Description

1-Undo The menu item 'Undo' undoes the last action.

2-Cut The menu item 'Cut' copies highlighted data into the clipboard and deletes them from the current view.

3-Copy The menu item 'Copy' copies highlighted data into the clipboard.

4-Paste The menu item 'Paste' inserts copied or cut data at the cursor position.

Menu item Description

P1-Data The menu item 'Data' allows you to change the view to the data section.

P2-Automatic The menu item 'Automatic' allows you to change the view to the automatic mode section.

P3-Manual The menu item 'Manual' allows you to change the view to the manual mode section.

P4-Process The menu item 'Process' allows you to change the view to the process section.

P5-Carriage The menu item 'Carriage' allows you to change the view to the carriage section.

Page 47: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

45

2

Application menu bar, continued

3-Section, continued

4-Function With the menu items of the application menu "4-Function", the same functions can be ex-ecuted as with the function keys. The menu items are different from view to view, just as the function keys are, too.

The table describes the menu items of the application menu '4-Function'.

continued on the next page

Menu item Description

P6 unassigned

P7 unassigned

Shift P1-Startup The menu item 'Startup' allows you to change the view to the set-up section.

Shift P2-Options The menu item 'Options' allows you to change the view to the options section.

Shift P3 unassigned

Shift P4-Technology data

The menu item 'Technology data' allows you to change the view to the technology data section.

Shift P5-Diagnosis The menu item 'Diagnosis' allows you to change the view to thediagnosis section.

Shift P6 unassigned

Shift P7 unassigned

Menu item Description

F1-..., F2-..., F3-..., etc.

The functions of the variable menu items 'F1-..., F2-..., F3-..., etc." correspond to the current allocations of the respective function keys in the function menu of the screen block.

The function of the menu item 'Level back' in the function menu of the screen block and switches back by one view or by one function menu level, respectively. This may be continued until the basic view or the basic function menu is reached.

Page 48: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

46

2

Application menu bar, continued

4-Function, continued

5-View The table describes the menu items of the application menu '5-View'.

continued on the next page

Menu item Description

Extended menu >> or Extended menu<<

The function of the menu item 'Extended menu >>' correspondsto the 'Extended function menu' key in the function menu of the screen block. An arrow to the right of the row of function symbols on the screen indicates that more than eight functions are available si-multaneously in a menu. In this case, you may switch over to fur-ther functions with the Extended function menu item. If the extended function menu is already displayed, you can switch back to the initial function menu with the menu item 'Extended function menu<<'.If more than two function menus are available, you can switch to the respective next function menu by means of the menu item "Extended menu". After the last function menu, the first function menu is displayed again.

Menu item Description

1-Status bar With the menu item 'Status bar' you can determine whether the status bar is displayed at the lower border of the screen.If the status bar is displayed, a check mark is displayed to the left of the menu item.

2-Status and error messages

With the menu item 'Status and error messages' you can display the dialog box 'Status and error messages'.

3-View-ID With the menu item 'View-ID' you can display the dialog box 'View identification'.The identifications of the current view and the current sectionare displayed.

Page 49: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

47

2

Application menu bar, continued

5-View, continued

6-Extras The table describes the menu items of the application menu '6-Extras'.

7-Help The table describes the menu items of the application menu '7-Help'.

continued on the next page

Menu item Description

4-Operating mode With the menu item 'Operating mode' you can display the dialog box 'Operating mode display'.

The following is displayed hereOperating mode

Additional information

Interruption: operating mode

Interruption: additional information

Task execution state

Interruption: task execution state

Menu item Description

1-ATAS Control Sys-tem Mangement

By means of the menu item 'ATAS Control System Mangement' the application 'ATAS Control System Mangement' can be start-ed. This maintainance program makes it possible to save and restore the work files and update the system files (see Service manual).

Menu item Description

1-Table of contents With the menu item 'Table of contents' you can display the table of contents of the online help.

2-Search With the menu item 'Search' you can display the search function of the online help.

3-Index With the menu item 'Index' you can display the index of the on-line help.

4-Function help With the menu item 'Function help' you can display the corre-sponding help topic for the current view.

5-Error help With the menu item 'Error help' you can display the correspond-ing help topic for the current error message.

Page 50: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operator panel

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

48

2

Application menu bar, continued

7-Help, continued

Menu item Description

6-About... With the menu item 'About...' you can retrieve information about the current version of the operating control and the machine control.

Page 51: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating philosophy

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

49

33

3 Basic operating philosophyOperatingphilosophy389.01.005500000.400.388-GBOper atinginstr uct ions -Prel iminary inf ormati onVISI ON 55

Overview

Introduction In this chapter the basic principles and rules of the operation of the control are explained.The chapter is about e.g. the different screen views, the use of the function keys, etc.

What’s in this Chapter? This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Sections of the control operation 50

Views 53

Dialog boxes 56

Key functions 61

Page 52: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating philosophy

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

50

3

Sections of the control operation

Introduction The operation of the control is divided into several sections which can be accessed with the seven section keys "P1" - "P7". Additionally, further sections can be selected with the key combination 'Shift' + <section key>.The display of the sections can be changed at any time.

Coloured marking Each section has a specific colour. The background of each symbol field shows the respec-tive section colour. Furthermore the background of the function menu also shows the sec-tion colour.

Sections P1 - P7 The table shows the allocations of the section keys 'P1' - 'P7'.

continued on the next page

Note: The colours of the sections are preset. This setting can be changed to adjust the control to the preferences of the operator.

Key Section symbol Section name

P1 Data

P2 Automatic mode

Page 53: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating philosophy

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

51

3

Sections of the control operation, continued

Sections P1 - P7, continued

Section 'Data' The "Data" section contains e.g. the file manager and the part program editor.

The file manager has the functions:Display of directories and data sources

Data management

Selection of different data types.

The part program manager has the functions:Display of part programs

Editing of part programs.

Section 'Automatic mode'

The "Automatic mode" section comprises all functions which include a program-controlled movement of the machine, e. g. the automatic processing of the part by means of a part program.

Section 'Manual mode' The "Manual mode" section comprises all functions including an operator-controlled move-ment of the machine, e. g. the manual control of the axes by means of the joystick.

Section 'Process' The "Process" section serves for the process control, i. e., the process to work on the blank with, is selected in this section.

Section 'Carriage' The "Carriage" section serves for the display of motor carriages, trailed carriages and tools as well as for the definition of the carriage clamping.

continued on the next page

Key Section symbol Section name

P3 Manual mode

P4 Process

P5 Carriage

P6 - not used

P7 - not used

Page 54: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating philosophy

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

52

3

Sections of the control operation, continued

Sections Shift + P1 - P7 In addition to the seven standard sections, it is possible to select further sections with the key combination 'Shift' + <section key>.

The allocations of the section keys 'P1' - 'P7' in conjunction with the 'Shift' key are listed in the table.

Section 'Startup' The "Startup" section contains all functions necessary for the operation of the control, as well as the constant editor for the general configuration of the control.Most functions of the startup section can only be used in service mode; they are described in the Service manual.

Section 'Options' The "Options" section serves for the setting of selected functions as e. g. languages, oper-ator rights, machine behavior or data logging.

Section 'Technology data'

The "Technology data" section contains the technology data display. By means of the tech-nology data display the TDF files can be displayed, loaded and edited.

Section 'Diagnosis' The "Diagnosis" section serves for the function check of the control components and theconnected hardware devices. The functions of the diagnosis section are described in the Service manual.

Note: Not all section keys have a double allocation. By pressing the Shift key you can display the symbols of the section keys with double allocation.

Keys Section symbol Section name

Shift + P1 Startup

Shift + P2 Options

Shift + P3 - not used

Shift + P4 Technology data

Shift + P5 Diagnosis

Shift + P6 - not used

Shift + P7 - not used

Page 55: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating philosophy

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

53

3

Views

Introduction The screen of the control has several views that are frequently used.

These are the following views:View 'Standard'

View 'Explorer'

View 'Graphic'

View 'Table'

View 'Tree'

Here the individual views are presented and it is described how to navigate in these views.

View 'Standard' The view "standard" is divided into three information fields and is used for the sections manual mode, automatic mode and process.By means of the cursor keys and the enter key the displayed axes can be activated or de-activated. An activated axis is displayed yellow.

The graphic shows the basic view of the 'Automatic mode' section with activated axes:

View 'Explorer' The view "Explorer" is divided into a tree view on the left side and a list view on the right side. By means of the F1 key "Display selection" you can switch between the tree view and the list view. In the different views you can navigate by means of the cursor keys. Subdi-rectories can be opened and closed by means of the cursor keys "Right" resp. "Left".The Explorer view is used e.g. for the file manager and the constant editor.

continued on the next page

Page 56: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating philosophy

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

54

3

Views, continued

View 'Explorer', continued

The graphic shows the file manager in the data section:

View 'Graphic' In the view "Graphic" you can navigate by means of the cursor keys. Exceptions are the carriage selection and the configuration. In these cases for safety rea-sons you also have to press the key "F1". The view "Graphic" is used e.g. for the Startup section.

The graphic shows the basic view of the Startup section:

View 'Table' In the view "Table" you can navigate by means of the cursor keys.The table view is used e.g. for the section Options.

continued on the next page

Page 57: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating philosophy

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

55

3

Views, continued

View 'Table', continued

The graphic shows the view of the DDE-related options in the 'Options' section:

View 'Tree' In the view 'Tree' you can navigate by means of the cursor keys. Subdirectories can be opened and closed by means of the cursor keys 'Right' resp. 'Left'.The view 'Tree' is used e.g. for the section Options.

The graphic shows the view of the control-related options in the 'Options' section:

Page 58: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating philosophy

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

56

3

Dialog boxes

Introduction The control communicates with the operator via dialog boxes displayed on screen accord-ing to the respective situations. These dialog boxes can perform a lot of tasks, as e. g. in-dicate errors, offer a possibility for text entry or ask the operator to acklowledge a message. The different types of dialog boxes which may be displayed on the screen are presented and explained in the following.

Confirm/cancel Usually dialog boxes are confirmed by pressing the "F1" key and are aborted by pressing the "F8" key.

Status and error mes-sages

Status and error messages are listed in the same dialog box. For this, it is unimportant which view and which section are currently displayed. The message superposes the cur-rent view.The status or error message consists of the four columns "Type", "ID", "Description" and"Time".In the column "Type", either the symbol "MC", "OC" or "PLC" is displayed, depending on whether the message is related to the operation control (OC), the machine control (MC) or the PLC (PLC). The column "ID" includes a number allocated to the current message. The column "Description" contains a short description of the status or error message, respec-tively. The column "Time" indicates the point of time when the message occurred.The current function menu above the function keys of the initial view is superposed. The function keys F1 "OK" and F8 "Cancel" are available.If you press the key F1 "OK", the message is acknowledged and will be deleted. If you press the key F8 "Cancel", the message is not displayed any longer, but it will not be de-leted. Using the application menu 'Status & error dialog' will re-display the message.

Error messages Error messages indicate that the control is not working properly, e. g. a part program can-not be opened. In case of an error message, the symbol in the column "Type" is red.

Error message example

If an error message occurs, an error symbol will be displayed in the RUN/STOP display in the upper right corner of the screen.

continued on the next page

Page 59: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating philosophy

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

57

3

Dialog boxes, continued

Error messages, continued

Status messages Status messages show that something has changed in the current situation of the control, e. g. the service mode has been switched on. In case of a status message, the symbol in the column 'Type' is blue.

Status message example

Information boxes Information boxes will open in order to inform the user about control-specific facts. E. g., if the user presses the key "Level back" during an automatic program processing, an infor-mation box opens indicating that the required action cannot be performed. The current function menu of the initial view is superposed, and the function keys of the information box are displayed. Before further actions can take place, the user must first re-act to the information box according to the situation, e. g. by pressing the function keys F1 "OK", F8 "Cancel", etc.

continued on the next page

Note: If you press the key F8 'Cancel', the error message is not displayed any longer, but it will not be deleted. The error symbol in the RUN/STOP display in the upper right corner of the screen is still displayed. If the error occurs again, the error message will notbe displayed again.

CAUTION

An error message is displayed

In case of an error message, consult the detailed description of the error mes-sage according to the number displayed in the column "ID" and follow the in-structions given there.

Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment dam-age.

Page 60: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating philosophy

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

58

3

Dialog boxes, continued

Information boxes, continued

Information box example

Selection boxes Selection boxes are opened for opening and saving a file, e. g. a part program. They show a list of the files of the related directory. The file names are sorted in alphabetical order.This list can be navigated by means of the cursor keys, the handwheel or the alphanumeric keys. With every letter or number entered, the cursor is positioned to the first file with the corresponding first letter or first number.

Selection box example

continued on the next page

Page 61: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating philosophy

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

59

3

Dialog boxes, continued

Selection boxes, continuedTo change the displayed directory you have to move the cursor to the path display of the directory by means of the "Tab" key. Afterwards press the cursor key "Down" to open the directory tree. Select the desired directory by means of the cursor keys and press the "Tab" key.

Input boxes Input boxes are opened for functions which are linked to a value or to another entry. If a certain program line within a program is to be selected for example in the part program ed-itor, then the operator must enter the appropriate number of the program line. For this case an input box can be opened.You can navigate between the text boxes by means of the "Tab" key and inside the text boxes by means of the cursor keys. The current function menu of the initial view is superposed, and the function keys of the input box are displayed. Before further actions can be performed, the operator must first react to the input box according to the situation, e. g. by pressing the keys F1 "OK", F8 "Cancel", etc.

Input box example 1

continued on the next page

Page 62: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating philosophy

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

60

3

Dialog boxes, continued

Input boxes, continued

Input box example 2

Input box example 3

Text boxes You can navigate between the text boxes by means of the "Tab" key and inside the text boxes by means of the cursor keys. Furthermore, it is possible to use the backspace key and the "Del" key to delete within text boxes.

Page 63: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating philosophy

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

61

3

Key functions

Introduction The keys of the function menu lead either to a function submenu or trigger a function. The key functions that trigger a function are divided into three groups:

Pushbutton

Switch without response

Switch with response

Availability The functions can either be available or not available. Available functions can be recog-nized by the visible symbol in the respective symbol field. Not available functions do not have a visible symbol.

Coloured marking If a function is triggered by means of a function key, the coloured representation of the sym-bol field is changed. According to the type of key function (pushbutton, switch with re-sponse, switch without response) the symbol field is coloured.

Pushbutton In case of the key function "pushbutton" the background of the symbol field is displayed in the function colour while the respective key is pressed. As soon as the operator releases the key, the symbol field is displayed in normal colour.

Switch without re-sponse

In case of the key function "switch without response" the background of the symbol field is displayed in the function colour if the key has been pressed once. The function is now ac-tive. As soon as the operator presses the key a second time the symbol field is displayed in normal colour.

Switch with response In case of the key function "switch with response" the symbol in the symbol field is dis-played flashing after the operation. The function is now activated. As soon as the operator presses the "RUN" key, the function is carried out and the symbol field is now displayed in the function colour. If the function is ended the symbol field is displayed in normal colour again.

Note: The representation of the symbol fields that are assigned to the function keys can be changed so that texts instead of symbols are displayed. The following description as-sumes that symbols are displayed. The described types of representation are equally val-id for texts, i.e. texts are also displayed with a coloured background resp. flashing.

Note: It is possible that greyed symbols are assigned to not available functions. This rep-resentation depends on the individual setting and can be changed by the operator.

Page 64: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating philosophy

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

62

3

Page 65: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating example

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

63

44

4 Operating exampleOperatingexampl e489.01.005500000.400.388-GBOperat ing instructions- Preliminar yinfor mationVISION 55

Overview

Introduction In this chapter, the basic working steps for the use of the control are presented to you by means of an example. With this "check list" you will be able to perform the quick and easy processing of a workpiece with a stored part program.

Reference manual You can find a detailed description of the individual working processes in the correspond-ing chapters of the Reference manual.

What’s in this Chapter? This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Note: Due to the fact that not all possibilities of the control can be presented here, this chapter does not release you from reading the complete operating instructions.

Topic Page

Installation 64

Calling and executing the stored part program 67

Interrupting and continuing a running part program 70

Calling the Help function 72

Finishing the work and switching off the 24 Volt Power 73

Page 66: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating example

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

64

4

Installation

Introduction The installation comprises all necessary preparatory works, including the switching on of the machine. Furthermore, the preparation of the control to the operation and the homing of the machine belong to the installation, too.

Task definition You want to establish the preconditions for the operation of the machine and the control.

Prerequisite You have read and understood the safety precautions valid for the control and for the machine.

The machine has been started up.

The clamping status is 'Like'.

The working area home has been defined.

The machine and the control are switched off.

There is still no blank on the machine.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control elements

1 Switch the machine on by means of the main switch. The control is started and displays a status message indicating that the machine control is ready for opera-tion and that the connection has been established be-tween machine control and operation control.

2 Confirm this message by pressing the F1 OK key.

3 Ensure that the machine is supplied with all necessary operating resources (as e. g. gas), as described in the Machine manual.

4 Press the key combination Shift + RUN in order to switch on the 24 Volt Power of the control.

For acknowledgement purposes, the 24V symbol in the status bar of the screen is not displayed as crossed out any more.

Page 67: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating example

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

65

4

Installation, continued

Procedure, continued

continued on the next page

Step Action Control elements

5 Press the section key P3 Manual in order to switch to the 'Manual mode' section.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is dis-played.

6 Press the F4 Homing procedure key in order to start the movement to the reference point.The key F4 "Homing procedure" flashes.

7 Press the RUN key in order to trigger the homing pro-cedure.The mechanic reference cams are hit. After that, themachine will be referenced and the control now knows the machine zero point.

For acknowledgement purposes, the homing proce-dure symbol in the status bar of the screen is not dis-played as crossed out any more.

8 Press the F2 Positioning motion key.The "Positioning motions" view is displayed.

Page 68: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating example

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

66

4

Installation, continued

Procedure, continued

Result The machine and the control are ready to operate now. A part program can be executed.

Step Action Control elements

9 Press the F2 Move to working area home key in or-der to start the motion towards the fix point of the work-ing area.The key F2 "Move to working area home" flashes.

10 Press the RUN key in order to trigger the motion to-wards the working area home.The motor carriage moves towards the working area home.

11 Now position the blank to be machined.

Page 69: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating example

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

67

4

Calling and executing the stored part program

Introduction After the installation, the machine and the control are ready for operation. Now you can call the part program to be used for machining the part.

Task definition You want to call and subsequently execute a stored part program.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

The blank has been positioned.

A stored part program is available.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control elements

1 Press the P1 Data key to switch to the data section.

The file manager is displayed and the left window - the tree view - is active.

2 Select the directory that contains the part program that is to be executed by means of the Up resp. Down cursor key.

3 Press the F1 Display selection key in order to change to the right window of the file manager (the list view).

4 Select the part program that is to be executed by means of the Up- resp. Down cursor key.

Page 70: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating example

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

68

4

Calling and executing the stored part program, continued

Procedure, continued

continued on the next page

Step Action Control elements

5 Press the F3 Run program key in order to call the required part program.

Subsequently, the view automatically switches to the sec-tion 'Automatic mode'. The program is displayed graphical-ly.

6 Press the F1 Display key.The view "Switching the coordinate display" is displayed.

Page 71: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating example

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

69

4

Calling and executing the stored part program, continued

Procedure, continued

Result A part program for the machine has been selected and will now be executed.

Step Action Control elements

7 Press the F1 Machine koordinates key or F2 Program coordinates to display the axes.

The axes are displayed left of the main display.

8 Press the Tab key until the focus in the form of a broken rectangle is on the desired axis.

9 Press the Enter key to select the axis.The field with the axis designation is highlighted in colour.

10 Repeat the steps 8 and 9 until all desired axes are selected.

11 Press the RUN key to execute the program.

Page 72: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating example

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

70

4

Interrupting and continuing a running part program

Introduction A running working process on the machine can be stopped and interrupted in any workingposition, e. g. in order to replace a nozzle.Subsequently, the working process can be resumed at the same position.

Task definition You want to interrupt the part program during the running working process, replace a noz-zle and continue the working process after the interruption.

Prerequisite A part program is currently executed.

The latch mode is set for manual control .

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control elements

1 Interrupt the working process by pressing the STOP key.The program execution is interrupted and the tool is switched off.

2 Press the function key F3 Run at program interruption.The view "Run at program interruption" is displayed.

3 Move the motor carriage to the required position by means of the joystick and replace the nozzle.

4 Press the Level back key in order to return to the 'Program execution' view.

The input box 'End automatic interruption' is displayed.

5 Select the option 'Back to contour with stop on the contour' and press the F1 OK key.

Page 73: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating example

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

71

4

Interrupting and continuing a running part program, continued

Procedure, continued

Result The part program is continued at the point of interruption.

Step Action Control elements

6 Press the RUN key. The tool returns to the point of interruption and stops there.

7 Switch the tool on again (see Machine manual).

8 Press the RUN key again.

Page 74: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating example

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

72

4

Calling the Help function

Introduction The control offers a Help function which helps during problems with the operation. The Help content corresponds to the contents of the attached operating instructions.

Task definition You want to call the Help function.

Prerequisite The control is switched on.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

Result If context-sensitive Help is available, a Help window is displayed which displays informa-tion on the current view. If context-sensitive Help is not available, the basic Help view is displayed.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the Help key in the input block.The Help window opens.

Page 75: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating example

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

73

4

Finishing the work and switching off the 24 Volt Power

Introduction After having finished the work at the workpiece, it is recommended to move the motor car-riage to the working area home and to switch off the 24 Volt Power.

Task definition You want to finish the work at the workpiece and to switch off the 24 Volt Power.

Prerequisite The part program was executed.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

Result The motor carriage was moved to the working area home, and the 24 Volt Power was switched off.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the section key P3 Manual in order to switch to the section 'Manual mode'.The basic view of the section "Manual mode" is displayed.

2 Press the F2 Positioning motion key.The "Positioning motions" view is displayed.

3 Press the function key F2 Go to working area home in or-der to start the motion towards the working area home. The key "Move to working area home" flashes.

4 Press the RUN key in order to trigger the motion towards the working area home. The motor carriage moves towards the working area home.

5 Press the key combination Shift + STOP in order to switch off the 24 Volt Power of the control.

The 24 V symbol in the status bar of the screen is displayed crossed out.

Page 76: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Operating example

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

74

4

Page 77: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Reference Manual

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

75

IIII

II Reference ManualReference ManualII89.01.005500000. 400.388-GBOperati ngi nst ruct ions-Prelimi nar yinformat ionVISION 55

Overview

Introduction In contrast to the Operator Manual, the Reference Manual contains detailed information on the operation of all functions of the control. The functions covered in the chapter "Operating example" in the Operator Manual are also explained once more and expanded.

What’s in this part? This Part contains the following Chapters:

Chapter Chaptername Page

5 Installation 77

6 Utilization of the machine area 101

7 Manual mode 111

8 Providing and editing data 145

9 Prepare and execute part programs 195

10 Processes 211

Page 78: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Reference Manual

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

76

II

Page 79: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Installation

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

77

55

5 InstallationInstallat ion589.01.005500000.400. 388-GBOperatinginstructions -Preli minary informationVISION 55

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes how to prepare the control, as part of the machine, for operation, and how to adjust the settings so that you can begin executing part programs.

What’s in this Chapter? This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Note: This chapter does not cover start-up. Start-up is described in the Service Manual, and is assumed to have been completed.

Section Topic Page

5.1 First steps 78

5.2 Move to reference points 82

5.3 Blank alignment 89

Page 80: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

78

5

5.1 First steps

Overview

Introduction This section describes the first steps to bring the machine and the control to an operation-ally ready state. That includes, among other things, turning on the 24-Volt power of the con-trol.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Preparatory tasks for startup 79

Turning on the system and 24-Volt power 80

Page 81: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

79

5

Preparatory tasks for startup

Introduction Before the system is allowed to be started up, the preparatory tasks described in the ma-chine manual must be carried out.

Task definition You wish to prepare the system for operation.

Prerequisites You are familiar with:

the general accident prevention regulations

all safety regulations for the machine

the control.

Procedure Prepare the machine for power-up in accordance with the machine manual.

Result All measures for preventing bodily injury and property damage have been performed.The safety equipment of the system is now functional and ready for operation.

Page 82: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

80

5

Turning on the system and 24-Volt power

Introduction After the preparatory tasks described in the machine manual have been performed, the machine can be turned on and the control readied for operation.

Task definition You want to bring the system to an operationally ready state.

Prerequisite The preparatory tasks for placing the machine in operation have been performed.

Procedure Carry out the following steps:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control ele-ment

1 Unlock all EMERGENCY POWER OFF pushbuttons on the machine and the control.

2 Turn on the main switch of the machine and the auxiliary equipment, such as the gas supply, according to the descrip-tion in the machine manual.

The control starts and the status messages 2016 'the ma-chine control (MC) is ready.' and 2014 'The connection be-tween operation control (OC) and machine control (MC) has been established' are displayed.

3 Press the F1 OK key to acknowledge the messages.

4 Press the key combination Shift + RUN to turn on the 24-Volt power (24V) of the control.

The symbol for 24V in the status line indicates its active sta-tus.

Page 83: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

81

5

Turning on the system and 24-Volt power, continued

Result The switching voltage is turned on and the system is now ready for operation.

Page 84: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

82

5

5.2 Move to reference points

Overview

Introduction This section describes how you perform a manual or automatic machine reference and thereby make a reference system available to the control.

Reference system The reference is lost when the machine is turned off. After the system is turned on, the con-trol does not know what coordinate values are assigned to the chance location of the tool on the machine. After power-up the reference must therefore be accepted by moving over the reference switch of each axis.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Note: If the machine is equipped with a reference system, a reference point movement must be performed.

Topic Page

Reference points 83

Automatic homing procedure 84

Manual reference point movement 86

Establish reference point without reference switches 88

Page 85: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

83

5

Reference points

Introduction In order to restore the allocation of position and associated coordinates after turning on the control, a mechanical or inductive reference switch for each axis is mounted on most ma-chines. If the machine is moved over this switch in the operating mode "Reference point movement," the control recognizes this mechanically defined position as a reference point. Hence the machine zero point is known to the control, and every point of the machine area has the same clear coordinates at all times.

Determine reference point

The reference point of a machine can be determined in three different manners, depending on the hardware and software configuration of the system:

Manual reference point movement

Automatic machine reference

Reference point movement without reference switch

Reference point move-ment with gantry axes

For machines with gantry axes (second drive in the X direction) and absolute gantry control there are two reference switches in the X direction. To accept the reference, the machine moves to both reference points. This is the only way that both axes can always be returned to the same position relative to each other. The reference point movement in this axis is therefore not ended until after both reference points have been reached.

No reference point sys-tem

If your machine has no reference point system and you do not determine a reference point, the displayed reference points depend on the status of the axes whenever the machine is turned on. The machine coordinates can therefore vary widely from one power-up to the next. Because of the lack of a reference point, software limit switches cannot be defined. Increased caution is therefore in order when moving according to machine coordinates.

Page 86: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

84

5

Automatic homing procedure

Introduction To accept the reference point, you can perform an automatic homing procedure. This is an option. If your control does not have this option, you must perform a manual reference point movement (See Manual reference point movement, p. 86).

Task definition You wish to establish the reference point of the machine automatically.

Prerequisite The machine is turned on.

The option 'Automatic machine reference' is available.

The machine has reference switches on the main axes.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control elements

1 Press the section key P3 Manual in order to switch to the 'Manual mode' section.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is dis-played.

2 Press the F4 Homing procedure key in order to start the movement to the reference point.The key F4 "Homing procedure" flashes.

Page 87: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

85

5

Automatic homing procedure, continued

Procedure, continued

Result The machine and the control are ready to operate now.

Step Action Control elements

3 Press the RUN key to start the homing procedure.The machine moves to the reference switches in suc-cession. The machine is then referenced and the ma-chine zero point is known.

For acknowledgement purposes, the homing proce-dure symbol in the status bar of the screen is not dis-played as crossed out any more.

Page 88: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

86

5

Manual reference point movement

Introduction If the option "Automatic machine reference" is not present on the control, the reference point movement must be performed manually.

Task definition You wish to establish the reference point of the machine manually.

Prerequisite The system is turned on.

The machine has reference switches on the main axes.

The main view of the 'manual mode' is selected.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

CAUTION

The software limit switches are not operational during the reference point movement, since they are dependent on the reference point that is to be determined.

It can happen that a wrong choice of travel direction causes motion to the ma-chine stop.

Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment dam-age.

Step Action Control ele-ments

1 Press the F4 Homing procedure key in order to start the movement to the reference point.The F4 Reference point travel key flashes.

2 Use the cursor keys to select the axis to be referenced.

3 Press the Enter key to confirm the choice of axis. The sym-bol field of the axis is highlighted in colour.

4 Using the joystick, select the direction of travel.The selected direction of travel is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.

Page 89: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

87

5

Manual reference point movement, continued

Procedure, continued

Result The axis values entered into the machine constants have been accepted for the reference point.

Step Action Control ele-ments

5 Press the RUN key.The machine moves in the selected direction until the refer-ence switch is triggered. The end of the reference point movement is confirmed with a check next to the axis posi-tion of the referenced axis.

6 Repeat steps 2 - 5 for all the other axes.

Page 90: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

88

5

Establish reference point without reference switches

Introduction If your machine has no reference switches, you cannot perform a homing procedure. How-ever, if you can identify the reference point anyway, for example from markings on the ax-es, you can still establish the reference point with the help of this function.

Task definition You want to establish a reference point, although your machine has no reference switches.

Prerequisite The machine is turned on.

The main view of the 'manual mode' is selected.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

Result The axis values entered into the machine constants are accepted for the reference point.

Step Action Control ele-ment

1 Use the cursor keys to select the axes one after the other.

2 After selecting each axis press the Enter key to confirm the selection of the axis. The symbol fields of the axes are high-lighted in colour

3 Using the joystick, move to your chosen reference point

4 Press the F4 Homing procedure key in order to initiate es-tablishing the reference point.

5 Press the F1 Accept reference point key.

Page 91: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

89

5

5.3 Blank alignment

Overview

Introduction The function 'Blank alignment' offers the possibility of registering the angle of the superim-posed blank manually and modifying the execution of the part program accordingly. In thatway even blanks that are placed askew are processed as if they were lying on the workholding table at the correct angle.Normally the position of the blank is determined from three recorded points. In special cas-es this can also be done with two points. The angle determined in this way is entered into the program parameters automatically under 'blank rotation.' The farther apart the recorded points are, the greater is the precision of the determined angle of the blank. Depending on how the machine is equipped, a differentiation is made between the alterna-tives "manual blank alignment" and "automatic blank alignment."

Automatic blank align-ment

The function "Automatic blank alignment" is an option; that is, not every control has this function. The points needed for calculating the angle are moved to and recorded automatically in this procedure.

Manual blank alignment The function "Manual blank alignment" is only present if the function "Automatic blank alignment" is not present. The points needed for calculating the angle are moved to and recorded manually in this procedure.

Manual recording of three points

The operator moves to three positions on the blank. The third position, on the front edge of the blank, is used to determine the corner of the blank, which is defined as the program zero point.

Manual recording of two points

The operator moves to two positions on the blank. The second position is at the same time the program zero point.

Installation The blank alignment is not a necessary component of the installation, but depends on theposition of the blank. If the blank was placed at the correct angle on the workholding table, the blank does not have to be aligned.

continued on the next page

Note: When it is assumed in the course of the operating instructions that the installation has been performed successfully, this does not have to apply to the blank alignment.

Page 92: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

90

5

Overview, continued

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Manual blank alignment with three points 91

Automatic blank alignment 94

Manual blank alignment with two points 97

Page 93: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

91

5

Manual blank alignment with three points

Introduction The function "Manual blank alignment with three points" offers the possibility of registering the angle of the superimposed blank manually.To move to the points, it is usual to use the tool with which the blank is to be processed. However, the possibility also exists of using a positioning tool attached to the machine.

Schematic sequence The operator moves by hand to three positions on the blank, from which the control can recognize the position of the blank. As a result of recording the points, the control deter-mines the program zero point and the angle of rotation of the blank. The angle determined is entered into the program parameters automatically under 'blank rotation.' The farther apart the recorded points are, the greater is the precision of the determined an-gle of the blank.

The graphic shows the sequence of the manual blank alignment with three points:

The table names the elements of the graphic:

continued on the next page

Element Designation

1 First position

2 Second position

3 Third position

Page 94: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

92

5

Manual blank alignment with three points, continued

Task definition You wish to determine the angle between the superimposed blank and the workholding ta-ble and accept it into the program parameters.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F5 Workpiece preparation key.

2 Press the F1 Align blank key.The working area is depicted graphically.

3 Move the motor carriage to the first point that is to be re-corded. This point should be in the vicinity of the expect-ed angle intersection.

4 Press the F1 Accept current position to accept the cur-rent position of the motor carriage as a point.The point is identified in the graphic depiction with a "1." The symbol in the area to the left of the graphic depiction shows a "2."

5 Move the motor carriage to the second point that is to be recorded. This point should be on the long side of the blank.

6 Press the F1 Accept current position to accept the cur-rent position of the motor carriage as a point.The point is identified in the graphic depiction with a "2," and is connected with the first point by a line. The symbol in the area to the left of the graphic depiction shows a '3.'

7 Move the motor carriage to the third point that is to be re-corded. This point should be on the transverse side of the blank.

Page 95: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

93

5

Manual blank alignment with three points, continued

Procedure, continued

Result The position of the blank has been captured and the blank rotation has been entered into the program parameters. Part programs are now performed by the control so that they con-form to the orientation of the blank.

Step Action Control element

8 Press the F1 Accept current position to accept the cur-rent position of the motor carriage as a point.The point is identified in the graphic depiction with a '3,' and is connected with the second point by a line. The symbol in the area to the left of the graphic depiction is flashing.

9 If the motor carriage is to remain at the current position after the blank alignment, continue reading at Step 10.If you wish to move the motor carriage to the lower right carriage of the blank, press the RUN key.The motor carriage is moved to the lower right corner of the blank; the manual blank alignment is now finished.

10 Press the Back key if the motor carriage is to remain at the current position after the manual blank alignment.The manual blank alignment is now finished.

Page 96: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

94

5

Automatic blank alignment

Introduction The function 'automatic blank alignment' offers the possibility of registering the angle of the superimposed blank automatically. To determine the position of the blank in this way, the machine must be equipped with special sensors for recognizing the edge of the blank. In automatic blank alignment, the machine moves automatically to three points on the blank from which the control can recognize the position of the blank.

Schematic sequence The operator must position the sensor unit attached to the motor carriage over the blank. To do so, a position (A) in the vicinity of the corner is chosen, which is to be used later as the program zero point (C). The length, width and utilized side edge of the blank must be entered by means of an input box. From these data the control can calculate the three points (1, 2, 3) on the blank that must be moved to. As a result of recording the points, the control determines the program zero point and the angle of rotation of the blank. The angle determined is entered into the program parameters automatically under 'blank rotation.' When all the positions have been determined, the control moves the reference tool of the machine to the program zero point (C).The graphic shows the sequence of the automatic blank alignment:

The table names the elements of the graphic:

continued on the next page

Element Significance

A Freely chosen starting point

Page 97: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

95

5

Automatic blank alignment, continued

Schematic sequence, continued

Task definition You wish to determine the angle between the superimposed blank and the workholding ta-ble and accept it into the program parameters.

Prerequisite The machine is equipped with the necessary sensors (e.g. HKSENS).

A blank is in position.

The option 'Automatic blank alignment' is available.

The installation is complete.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Element Significance

B Calculated auxiliary point

C End point = program zero point

1 First point for the automatic blank alignment

2 Second point for the automatic blank alignment

3 Third point for the automatic blank alignment

Step Action Control element

1 Position the motor carriage with the sensor in the vicinity of the corner of the blank that is to be used later as the program zero point (C). This is usually the lower right cor-ner.

2 Press the F5 Workpiece preparation key.

3 Press the F1 Align blank key. The input box "Entries for the blank size and the search direction" opens.

Page 98: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

96

5

Automatic blank alignment, continued

Procedure, continued

Result The position of the blank has been captured and the corresponding angle has been regis-tered as a program parameter Program rotation, p. 200. part programs are now rotated by the control so that they conform to the orientation of the blank.

Step Action Control element

4 Using the letter and number keys, enter the size of the blank.Take care that the values are not larger than the actual blank, since otherwise the tool can be damaged when the blank alignment is performed.

5 Using the Tab key and the cursor keys, select the side from which the points for the blank alignment are to be approached (see graphic). Usually it is the right side (1st and 2nd points) and the botom side (3rd point).

6 Press the F1 OK key to confirm the entries. The 'blank alignment' view is displayed.The working area is depicted graphically.

7 Press the F1 Accept current position to activate the au-tomatic blank alignment. A symbol flashes on the screen.

8 Press the RUN key to start the automatic blank align-ment.The machine moves to the three points in sequence and displays them.After all three points have been moved to, the reference tool moves to the program zero point and stops there.

Page 99: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

97

5

Manual blank alignment with two points

Introduction The function "manual blank alignment with two points" offers the possibility of registering the angle of the superimposed blank manually.To move to the points, it is usual to use the tool with which the blank is to be processed. However, the possibility also exists of using a positioning tool attached to the machine.

Schematic sequence The operator moves by hand to two positions on the blank, from which the control can rec-ognize the position of the blank; one of the points must be the vertex of the blank. As a result of recording the points, the control determines the program zero point and the angle of rotation of the blank. The angle determined is entered into the program parameters au-tomatically under 'blank rotation.' The farther apart the recorded points are, the greater is the precision of the determined an-gle of the blank.

The graphic shows the sequence of the manual blank alignment with two points:

The table names the elements of the graphic:

continued on the next page

Element Designation

1 First position (vertex of blank)

2 Second position

Page 100: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

98

5

Manual blank alignment with two points, continued

Task definition You wish to determine the angle between the superimposed blank and the workholding ta-ble and accept it into the program parameters.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F5 Workpiece preparation key.

2 Press the F1 Align blank key.The working area is depicted graphically.

3 Press the F2 2-Point alignment key.The key is highlighted in colour.

4 Move the motor carriage to the first point that is to be re-corded. This point must be a vertex of the blank.

5 Press the F1 Accept current position to accept the cur-rent position of the motor carriage as a point.The point is identified in the graphic depiction with a "1." The symbol in the area to the left of the graphic depiction shows a "2."

6 Move the motor carriage to the second point that is to be recorded. This point must be on the long side of the blank.

7 Press the F1 Accept current position to accept the cur-rent position of the motor carriage as a point.The point is identified in the graphic depiction with a "2," and is connected with the first point by a line.

Page 101: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

99

5

Manual blank alignment with two points, continued

Procedure, continued

Result The position of the blank has been captured and the blank rotation has been entered into the program parameters. Part programs are now performed by the control so that they con-form to the orientation of the blank.

Step Action Control element

8 If the motor carriage is to remain at the current position after the manual blank alignment, continue reading at Step 8.If you wish to move the motor carriage to the lower right carriage of the blank, press the RUN key.The motor carriage is moved to the lower right corner of the blank; the manual blank alignment is now finished.

9 Press the Back key if the motor carriage is to remain at the current position after the manual blank alignment.The manual blank alignment is now finished.

Page 102: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Installation

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

100

5

Page 103: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

The machine area

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

101

66

6 Utilization of the machine areaThe machinearea689.01.005500000. 400.388-GBOper atingi nstr uct ions -Prel iminary informati onVISI ON 55

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes how the control utilizes the machine area. That includes the coor-dinate system with which the control works, the division of the machine area into working areas, and the various fixpoints such as the working area home or the machine home.

What’s in this Chapter? This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Coordinate system 102

Machine area 104

Working areas 107

Page 104: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

The machine area

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

102

6

Coordinate system

Introduction The control has a right-rotating, Cartesian coordinate system with X and Y axes.

Machine zero point The machine zero point is the reference point of the coordinate system of the machine. At this point the value of every coordinate is 0. The machine zero point is merely a theoretical point, however, and is neither displayed nor directly moved to by the control; its signifi-cance relates only to the position of the coordinate system.The position of the machine zero point is established indirectly by defining the actual value in the reference point (see axis constant 14).The machine zero point does not have to lie within the machine area (See Machine area, p. 104), but often the position of the machine zero point is identical to that of the machine home point (See Machine home, p. 104).

continued on the next page

Page 105: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

The machine area

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

103

6

Coordinate system, continued

Machine zero point, continued

The graphic shows various possibilities for the position of the machine zero point:

The table describes the elements of the graphic:

Number Description

1 Machine area

2 Machine zero point

Page 106: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

The machine area

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

104

6

Machine area

Introduction The machine area describes the entire travel range of all individual axes of the machine. It is bounded exclusively by the limit switches of the individual axes, which are established in the coordinate startup. Hence it has no specifically defined area boundaries. The machine area has a machine home point.

Machine home The machine home point is a defined position within the machine area for all axes. It is es-tablished in the coordinate startup and stored in the axis contents of the control. The ma-chine can be moved to the machine home point at any time with the help of the function 'Move to machine home.' (See Move to the machine home point , p. 125).Frequently the position of the machine home point is identical to that of the machine zero point (See Machine zero point, p. 102).

The graphic shows the machine area and the machine home point:

The table describes the elements of the graphic:

Axis limit switches To prevent the machine from being moved outside the machine area, the machine has limit switches on every axis.

continued on the next page

Number Description

1 Machine area

2 Machine area fixpoint

Page 107: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

The machine area

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

105

6

Machine area, continued

Axis limit switches, continued

There are two different types of axis limit switches:Mechanical limit switches

Software limit switches

Mechanical limit switches

In principle there are two mechanical limit switches per axis installed on the machine.

Software limit switches The software limit switches are intended to prevent mechanical damage. The coordinates of the software limit switches are recorded in the machine constants, and must be ahead of the mechanical limit switches. This prevents the machine from impacting a mechanical limit switch and being damaged.

continued on the next page

CAUTION

If the machine arrives at one of these limit switches, it comes to an abrupt stop.

Avoid such abrupt stopping at full speed, for example by using software limit switches.

Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment dam-age.

Note: Please make certain that all fixpoints, such as the machine home point, lie withinthe boundaries of the software limit switches. An exception is the machine zero point (See Machine zero point, p. 102), since it is only a theoretical point.

Page 108: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

The machine area

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

106

6

Machine area, continued

Software limit switches, continued

The graphic shows the position of the axis limit switch of the X axis:

The table describes the elements of the graphic:

Number Description

1 Machine area

2 Machine zero point

3 Software limit switches

4 Mechanical limit switches

Page 109: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

The machine area

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

107

6

Working areas

Introduction Working areas are freely definable, rectangular zones within the machine area, that have their own fixpoints (working area home points) and limit switches. Within the machine area of the control, during the working area definition six two-dimensional working areas of vary-ing sizes can be set up.

Arrangement of the working areas

The working areas can be arranged in any way, including overlapping, and are defined by their own working area limit switches. These software limit switches are determined in the working area definition and are stored in the machine constants. If sections of the machine do not lie within the working area, then these can only be moved to when all working areas are deactivated and hence the machine area has been activated.

The graphic shows various possibilities for the arrangement of the working areas:

The table describes the elements of the graphic:

continued on the next page

Number Description

1 Machine area

2 Machine zero point

3 Working area

Page 110: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

The machine area

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

108

6

Working areas, continued

Programs and working areas

Calling and starting programs or jobs is only possible when a working area is active. Within programs it is possible however to move to a position of the machine area, for example the machine home point, (See Machine home, p. 104) in order to wait there for example for a table change.

Multiple workholding tables

Working areas are ideal for machines with two or more workholding tables. With the help of the working areas, every workholding table can have its own software limit switches and its own working area home point.In addition, manual movements of the machine from one table to the next are eliminated. The machine can be manoeuvred quickly form one working area to the next by selecting a different working area home point.

Working area fixpoints Every working area has a working area home for all X and Y axes, determined at startup. The working area homes do not have to be located within a working area. For individual axes or motor carriages, or also for all axes, they can lie outside of the corresponding work-ing area. These points can be moved to with the help of the function 'Move to working area home.' (See Move to the working area home , p. 121)The use of fixpoint motions, for example when positioning the machine to process multiple workpieces at the same starting point, can be an enormously effective use of time for large workholding tables.

The graphic shows a working area including working area limit switches and the working area home point:

continued on the next page

Page 111: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

The machine area

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

109

6

Working areas, continued

Working area fixpoints, continued

The table describes the elements of the graphic:

Fix points Up to 12 fix points can be defined in the machine area, which can be moved to automati-cally at any time. The fix points do not have to be located within a working area. For individual axes or motor carriages, or also for all axes, they can lie outside of the working area. These points can be moved to with the help of the function'Move to the fix point.' (See Moving to the fix point , p. 120)

The graphic shows various possibilities for the arrangement of fix points:

continued on the next page

Number Description

1 Machine area

2 Machine zero point

3 Working area

4 Working area limit switches

5 Working area home

Page 112: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

The machine area

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

110

6

Working areas, continued

Fix points, continued

The table describes the elements of the graphic:

Program starting point A special point within the working area is the starting point of the most recently worked on program. This is defined by the user by pressing the 'RUN' key. The control stores this point internally, without the position of the point being displayed. If a new program is executed, the position of the point is automatically overwritten with the starting point coordinates of the current program. The starting point of the most recently worked on program can be moved to with the help of the function 'Move to the last program starting point.' (See Travel to the last program zero point, p. 124)

Number Description

1 Machine area

2 Machine zero point

3 Working area

4 Fix point

Page 113: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Manual mode

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

111

77

7 Manual modeManual mode789. 01. 005500000.400. 388-GBOperating instructions -Preliminary informationVI SION55

Overview

Introduction In the "Manual mode" section, all of the functions are packaged together that initiate oper-ator-controlled movement of the machine. Operator-controlled movement means manualcontrol of the tool with the help of the joystick or handwheel. You can switch over to this section at any time, unless a part program is being executed in automatic mode. In manual mode, switching to other sections such as the process section is possible without this having an effect on the process or the motion of the machine.

Calling the Manual mode section

Press the P3 Manual key in order to switch to the 'Manual mode' section.

Reference point move-ment

With the help of the function key F4 "Reference point movement" in the basic view of the "Manual mode" section you can perform the reference point movement. This function is de-scribed in the chapter 'Installation' under 'Moving to the reference point.' (See Move to ref-erence points, p. 82)

What’s in this Chapter? This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section Topic Page

7.1 Principles of manual mode 113

7.2 Positioning motion 119

7.3 Blank preparation 126

7.4 Trace and teach trace 129

Page 114: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

112

7

Page 115: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

113

7

7.1 Principles of manual mode

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes the basic functions of manual mode. That includes for example se-lection of the coordinate displays and the different manual operating modes.

Types of manual mode The possible types of manual mode are:Manual control with joystick in 'latch' mode

Manual control with joystick in 'tip' mode

Manual control with handwheel

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Note: In principle, manual control with the help of the joystick is active. Manual control with the help of the handwheel represents a special form.

Topic Page

Switching the coordinate display 114

Manual operation in 'latch' mode 115

Manual operation in 'tip' mode 116

Manual mode with handwheel 117

Selecting Axes 118

Page 116: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

114

7

Switching the coordinate display

Introduction In both manual mode and automatic mode the display of the axis positions can be switched between various coordinate displays and a feedrate display.

The following displays are available:Machine coordinates

Program coordinates

Speed

Task definition You wish to switch the display of the axis positions in manual mode.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

The basic picture of the manual mode or automatic mode is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result You have selected all three possible displays of the axes one after the other.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F1 Display selection key.The view "Switching the coordinate displays" is displayed; the symbol field of the most recently selected display type is highlighted in colour.

2 Press the F1 Machine coordinates key.The symbol field of the F1 'Machine coordinates' key is highlighted in colour. The axis coordinates are displayed according to the machine.

3 Press the F2 Program coordinates key.The symbol field of the F2 "Program coordinates" key is highlighted in colour; the axis coordinates are displayed ac-cording to the program.

4 Press the F3 Speed key.The symbol field of the F3 'Speed' key is highlighted in co-lour; the current axis speeds are displayed.

Page 117: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

115

7

Manual operation in 'latch' mode

Introduction The "latch" mode is a variant of manual mode. In "latch" mode, before the actual movement the direction must first be specified with the help of the joystick. The tool does not move until after the 'RUN' key has been pressed.

Task definition You wish to move the tool to a certain point in 'latch' mode.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

'Latch' mode is activated.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is displayed.

The necessary axes are activated.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The tool has been moved to the desired point.

Step Action Control ele-ments

1 Specify the direction by pressing the joystick in the desired direction.The direction is indicated with an arrow in the upper right corner of the screen.

2 Press the RUN key to start the motion of the tool. The tool moves in the chosen direction. The RUN symbol appears at the upper right of the screen.

3 Press the Stop key when the tool has reached the destina-tion point. The tool stops.

Page 118: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

116

7

Manual operation in 'tip' mode

Introduction The 'tip' mode is a variant of manual mode. In "tip" mode, the tool moves as long as the joystick is operated. In order not to have to keep pressing the joystick for longer distances, you can switch briefly to 'latch' mode.

Task definition You wish to move the tool to a certain point in "tip" mode with the help of the joystick.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

'Tip' mode is activated.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is displayed.

The necessary axes are activated.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The tool has been moved to the desired point.

Step Action Control ele-ments

1 Move the tool by pressing the joystick in the desired direc-tion.The RUN symbol appears at the upper left corner of the screen as long as the joystick is operated. At the same time, the direction is shown by an arrow.

2 If you do not wish to switch briefly to 'latch' mode, continue reading at step 4.If you wish to switch to switch to 'latch' mode, continue to hold the joystick in the desired direction and at the same time press the F1 Latch mode key..The F1 'Latch' mode key is highlighted in color; 'latch mode is now turned on. The tool continues to move in the desired direction and the joystick no longer needs to be operated.

3 Press the Stop key when the tool approaches the destina-tion point. The tool stops and the control switches automatically back to 'tip' mode.

4 Operate the joystick to position the tool at the desired point.

Page 119: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

117

7

Manual mode with handwheel

Introduction As an alternative to the manual mode with the help of the joystick, the tool can also be moved with the help of the handwheel. With every motion of the handwheel, the tool is moved by a preset step size.

Task definition You wish to move to a certain point with the help of the handwheel.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is displayed.

The necessary axes are activated.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The machine has moved to the selected fix point. The 'Positioning motions' view is again displayed.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F2 Positioning motion key. The "Positioning motions" view is displayed.

2 Press the F6 Handwheel movement key. The 'Handwheel movement' view is displayed. The step size is shown below the coordinate display. The current working area is depicted graphically.

3 Press the F1 Increase step width key or the F2 Decrease step width key to modify the step width that the tool moves with each notch of the handwheel.

4 Use the joystick to select the desired direction.The direction indicator shows the chosen direction.

5 Rotate the handwheel to move the tool by the set step size.When you rotate counter-clockwise, the tool moves in the negative direction; when you rotate clockwise it moves in the positive direction.

6 Press the Back key when the tool has reached the desired point. The working area is masked out again.

Page 120: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

118

7

Selecting Axes

Introduction To move a tool while in manual mode the respective axes have to be selected. Axes that are highlighted in colour are selected, axis that are marked grey are not selected.

Task definition You want to select axes to move the tool during manual mode.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is displayed.

Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The desired axes are selected. You can now move the tool during manual mode.

Note: If the machine has only one x axis and one y axis the axes can only be selected during the startup procedure.

Note: Simultaneously press the "Ctrl" key and the Enter key if you want to select all avail-able axes at once.

Step Procedure Control element

1 Press the Tab key until the focus is on the axes display.

2 Move the broken rectangle to the chosen axis by means of the cursor keys.

3 Press the Enter key to select the axis. The field with the axis designation is highlighted in colour.

4 Repeat the steps 1 to 3 until all desired axes are select-ed.

Page 121: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

119

7

7.2 Positioning motion

Overview

Introduction The function key F2 "Positioning motion" in the basic view of the manual mode switches to the "Positioning motion" view. This view bundles together all functions that enable a move-ment of the tool to a firmly defined point.

Various positioning motions

The following table lists the various target point movements:

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Position Symbol Designation

F1 Move to fix point (AP)

F2 Move to the working area home (AB)

F3 Move to target point

F4 Move to the zero point of the last program

F5 Move to the machine home

Topic Page

Moving to the fix point 120

Move to the working area home 121

Move to target point 122

Travel to the last program zero point 124

Move to the machine home point 125

Page 122: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

120

7

Moving to the fix point

Introduction Up to 12 fix points (See Defining fix points, p. 127) can be defined for the entire machine area. With the help of the function "Moving to the fix point" You can move directly to any fix point.During the move to the fix point, the current position of the tool is portrayed as a flashing point.

Task definition You wish to move to a fix point.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The machine moves to the selected fix point. The working area and the fix points are have been blanked again.

Note: Fix points can be moved to even if they are located outside of the current working area. However, afterward the motor carriage can only be moved back to the current work-ing area in manual mode by the shortest route. If you attempt to move away from the cur-rent working area, an error message is displayed.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F2 Positioning motion key.The "Positioning motions" view is displayed.

2 Press the F1 Move to fix point key.The symbol field of the F1 "Move to fix point" key flashes. Below the coordinate display, a pick list of the fix points is displayed. The machine area and the fix point displayed in the pick list are portrayed graphically.

3 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select a fix point from the pick list.

4 Press the RUN key to start moving to the fix point.The symbol field of the F2 "Move to fix points" key is high-lighted in colour. The position of the tool is represented by a moving symbol.

Page 123: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

121

7

Move to the working area home

Introduction Up to six different working areas can be defined on the control, each of which has a working area home. With the help of the function "Move to the working area home" you can move directly to the home point of the working area.When this function is selected, all existing working areas are displayed graphically and the position of the home point is illustrated by the number of the working area. The currently active working area is shown in a different colour.

Task definition You wish to move to the working area home of an existing working area.

Prerequisite At least one working area has been defined.

The installation is complete.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The machine has moved to the working area home of the selected working area. The work-ing areas have been masked out again.

Note: With the help of this function the working area can also be changed; that is, you can also move to the home point of an inactive working area. For this purpose, the soft-ware limit switches of the working areas are briefly deactivated and then reactivated.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F2 Positioning motion key.The "Positioning motions" view is displayed.

2 Press the F2 Move to working area homes key.The symbol field of the F2 'Move to working area homes' key flashes. The existing working areas are displayed graphically. Below the coordinate display, a pick list of the working areas is displayed.

3 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select a working area from the pick list.

4 Press the RUN key to start moving to the home point.The symbol field of the F2 'Move to working area homes' key is highlighted in colour. The position of the tool is rep-resented by a moving symbol.

Page 124: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

122

7

Move to target point

Introduction The function "Move to target point" offers you the possibility of steering the tool to a certain position within the working area currently in effect (absolute positioning) or to move it by a certain amount (incremental positioning).

Task definition You wish to move to a certain point in the current working area.

Prerequisite A working area has been defined.

The installation is complete.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control ele-ment

1 Press the F2 Positioning motion key.The "Positioning motions" view is displayed.

2 Press the F3 Move to target point key.The dialog box "Move to position" appears.

3 Press the Tab key until the focus is on the selection group 'Mode.'

4 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the option 'Ab-solute,' if you wish to move to a certain position within the currently value working area. Select the option "Incremental" if you wish to move the tool from the present position by a certain amount.

5 Press the Tab key until the focus is on the input field of the speed.The speed shows the currently set speed, and can be changed in the range from 0 to the maximum speed.

6 Use the number and letter keys to enter the speed at which the movement is to be executed.

Page 125: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

123

7

Move to target point, continued

Procedure, continued

Result The tool moves at the prescribed speed to the desired position or by the desired amount.

Step Action Control ele-ment

7 Press the Tab key until the focus is on the input field of the X axis.The input field shows the current machine coordinate, or 0 in the case of an incremental move.

8 Use the number and letter keys to enter the desired posi-tion of the X axis or an amount by which the X axis is to be moved.

9 Press the Tab key until the focus is on the input field of the Y axis.The input field shows the current machine coordinate, or 0 in the case of an incremental move.

10 Use the number and letter keys to enter the desired posi-tion of the Y axis or an amount by which the Y axis is to be moved.

11 To confirm the entries, press the F1 Accept key.The dialog box is closed. The symbol field of the F3 'Move to target point' key flashes. The working area is displayed. The target position is shown as a small star.

12 Press the RUN key.

Page 126: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

124

7

Travel to the last program zero point

Introduction This function enables the machine to move to the zero point of the last executed part pro-gram.

Task definition You want to move to the zero point of the last executed part program.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The machine has moved to the zero point of the last executed part program. The working area has been masked out again.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F2 Positioning motion key. The "Positioning motions" view is displayed.

2 Press the F4 Move to program zero point key. The symbol field of the F4 'Move to program zero point' keyflashes. The current working area is depicted graphically.

3 Press the RUN key to start moving to the program zero point.The symbol field of the F4 'Move to program zero point' keyis highlighted in colour. The position of the tool is represent-ed by a moving symbol.

Page 127: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

125

7

Move to the machine home point

Introduction The machine home point is a defined position within the machine area for all axes. It is es-tablished in the coordinate startup see (Service manual) and stored in the axis contents of the control. The machine can be moved to the machine home point at any time with the help of the function "Move to the machine home point."

Task definition You wish to move to the machine home point.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The machine moves to the machine home point. The working areas are inactive.

Note: With the help of this function it is also possible to deactivate the working areas; thatis, after the move to the machine home point the working area limit switches are inactive and the tool can be moved in the entire machine area.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F2 Positioning motion key. The "Positioning motions" view is displayed.

2 Press the F5 Move to machine home point key. The symbol field of the F5 'Move to machine home point' key flashes.

3 Press the RUN key to start moving to the machine home point.The symbol field of the F5 'Move to machine home point' key is highlighted in colour. The position of the tool is repre-sented by a moving symbol.

Page 128: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

126

7

7.3 Blank preparation

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes the adaptation of the control to the present blank. That includes for example the defining of fix points and the optimal utilisation of non-rectangular blanks.

Manual blank alignment With the help of the function key F1 "Manual blank alignment" in the "Blank preparation" view of the "Manual mode" section, you can detect the angle of the positioned blank and modify the execution of the part programs accordingly. This function is described in the chapter on Installation (See Blank alignment, p. 89).

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Defining fix points 127

Page 129: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

127

7

Defining fix points

Introduction The function 'Define fix point' offers the possibility of establishing up to 12 fix points. These points do not have to be within one working area, and can afterward be moved to automat-ically.

Task definition You wish to establish several fix points.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

The basic view of the 'Manual mode' section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Note: If the machine has several motor carriages, a fix point is established at the same time for each motor carriage. It can happen that the fix point for one or more motor car-riages lies outside the current working area.

Note: If you wish to establish a fix point outside of the current working area, you must first deactivate the current working area by moving to the machine home position. (See Move to the machine home point , p. 125) You can then establish a fix point independent of the working areas.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F5 Workpiece preparation key.The 'Tool preparation' view is displayed.

2 Press the F2 Define fix point key.The 'Fix point definition' view is displayed. Below the coor-dinate display a pick list appears with the fix points. On the right side, the machine area is displayed.

3 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select from the pick list the fix point that you wish to establish.

4 Using the joystick (tip mode) (See Manual operation in 'tip' mode, p. 116), move the tool to the desired point.

5 Press the F1 Accept fix point key. The fix point is displayed graphically at the desired point.

Page 130: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

128

7

Defining fix points, continued

Procedure, continued

Result You have established several fix points.

Step Action Control element

6 Repeat steps 3 - 5 until you have established all the desired fix points.

Page 131: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

129

7

7.4 Trace and teach trace

Overview

Introduction If an optical tracing system has been connected as optional feature, the control can be used for copying (trace) and digitizing (teach trace) graphical patterns.In order to do so the graphical pattern has to be placed in the machine area. Initially the machine axes move in a preselected direction towards the line of a graphical pattern until the tracer head of the tracing system recognizes the edge. As soon as the tracing system has recognized the edge, the traversing direction is changed according to the preselected turning direction (to the left/to the right) so that the tracer head now follows the edge of the graphical pattern.

Option The functions "Trace" and "Teach trace" are options and have to be purchased separately.

Trace In trace mode, the edge of the graphical pattern is traced and is implemented at the same time by the machine while working on a workpiece.

Teach trace In teach trace mode, the edge of a graphical pattern is traced, and is converted to a part program and saved.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Section Topic Page

7.4.1 Trace 131

7.4.2 Teach trace 136

Page 132: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

130

7

Page 133: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

131

7

7.4.1 Trace

Overview

Introduction In trace mode, the edge of the graphical pattern is traced and is implemented at the same time by the machine while working on a workpiece.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Note: Machine movement is only stopped when the control no longer recognizes any edges. I.e. a closed contour is traced continuously in trace mode.

Topic Page

Parameter entry in trace mode 132

Tracing 134

Page 134: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

132

7

Parameter entry in trace mode

Introduction In order to execute the trace procedure, the following parameters have to be entered:Feed

Kerf

Parameter The following tables describes the parameters:

Task definition You wish to process a workpiece with the help of the trace function.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

The "Manual mode" section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Name Description

Feed The "Feed" parameter designates the speed at which the contour is traced. During tracing, the speed can only be changed via the feed po-tentiometer to a maximum value of 100%.

Kerf The "Kerf" parameter designates the lateral offset of the coupled light source/ tool unit. This offset is used to make allowance for the kerf width of the traced part.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F6 key Trace/teach trace.

2 Press the F1 key Trace.The "Trace parameter entry" input box is displayed.

3 Enter the parameters for Feed and Kerf using the number keys.

4 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the desired tracing type.

Page 135: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

133

7

Parameter entry in trace mode, continued

Procedure, continued

Result The "Trace" view for executing the trace procedure is displayed.

Step Action Control element

5 Press the F1 Set Trace parameters key to confirm the pa-rameter entries.

Page 136: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

134

7

Tracing

Introduction After specification of the trace parameters the trace procedure can be started.

Status display During execution of the trace procedure, the following symbols on the screen show the cur-rent status:

Task definition You want to record a graphical contour pattern by means of the trace procedure and simul-taneously process a workpiece according to these specifications.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

A graphical pattern of the contour is available within the machine area.

The machine is equipped with an optical tracing system.

The optical tracing system has been prepared for operation.

A blank has been put on and prepared for processing.

The trace parameters have been entered.

The "Trace" view is displayed in the "Manual Mode" area.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Symbol Significance

Searching contour

Found contour, tracing active

Lost contour

Step Action Control element

1 With the help of the joystick, position the tracer head of the optical tracing system close to the graphic which you want to record.

2 Press the F5 key Turn Left or F5 key Turn Right to de-fine the turning direction after the contour was found.

Page 137: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

135

7

Tracing, continued

Procedure, continued

Result You have recorded a graphical contour pattern with the help of the trace procedure and processed a workpiece according to these specifications.

Step Action Control element

3 Press the F1 key Start tracing to activate the trace pro-cedure.The symbol field of the key flashes.

4 Use the joystick to indicate the direction of the graphic.The arrow of the direction indicator on the screen indi-cates the chosen direction.

5 Press the RUN key to initiate the trace procedure.The symbol field of the F1 key "Start Tracing" is high-lighted in color.The tracer head of the optical tracing system moves to-wards the graphic at half of the predefined speed search-ing for the contour.As soon as the tracer head has found the contour of the graphical pattern it follows the contour. At the same time, the workpiece is processed by the tool connected.

6 Press the STOP key to stop the trace procedure as soon as processing of the contour is complete.Recording of the graphical contour pattern and process-ing of the workpiece are ended. The stations move up automatically.

Page 138: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

136

7

7.4.2 Teach trace

Overview

Introduction In teach trace mode, the edge of a graphical pattern is traced, and is converted to a part program and saved.The control constantly adopts measuring points from the graphical pattern at very short in-tervals. The measuring points which are necessary for generating the part program, are se-lected automatically. The selected points are connected with a straight line and in this way form a complete part program which can be executed in automatic mode.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Note: In teach trace mode, the control recognizes the point at which tracing of the edgehad begun and automatically completes the contour here.

Topic Page

Parameter entry for the teach trace mode 137

Executing the teach trace procedure 139

Recording several closed contours 143

Page 139: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

137

7

Parameter entry for the teach trace mode

Introduction In order to execute the teach trace procedure, the following parameters have to be entered:Feed

Min. point-to-point distance

Tracing type

Lead-in length

Lead-in angle

Lead-in type

Lead-out length

Lead-out angle

Lead-out type

Parameters The following tables describes the parameters:

continued on the next page

Name Description

Feed The "Feed" parameter designates the feed speed at which the con-tour is traced. During tracing, the speed can only be changed via the feed potentiometer to a maximum value of 100%.

min. point-to-point distance

The larger the mininum point-to-point distance, the larger the smallest line sections. This is essential for the speed at which the program can be executed later on. With only small line sections, it is not possible to keep high speeds. On the other hand, the level of accuracy is higher with small line sections.

Tracing type The "Tracing type" parameter influences the way the tracer head recognizes the line and depends on the line width of the pattern. You can choose between "line" and "edge". Select "line" if the line width is less than 1.2 mm. Select "edge" if the line width of the pat-tern is more than 1.2 mm or if the pattern is a shape filled with color.

Lead-in length Entering length specifications for lead-in generation.

Lead-in angle Entering angle specifications for lead-in generation.

Lead-in type You can choose between "straight lead-in" and "circular lead-in".

Lead-out length Entering length specifications for lead-out generation.

Lead-out angle Entering angle specifications for lead-out generation.

Lead-out type You can choose between "straight lead-out" and "circular lead-out".

Page 140: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

138

7

Parameter entry for the teach trace mode, continued

Task definition You wish to process a workpiece with the help of the teach trace function.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

The "Manual mode" section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

Result The window for the teach trace procedure is displayed.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F6 key Trace/teach trace.

2 Press the F2 key Teach trace.The 'Teach trace parameter entry' input box is displayed.

3 Enter the parameters for feed, minimum point-to-point dis-tance, lead-in length, lead-in angle, lead-out length and lead-out angle using the number keys.

4 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the desired tracing type as well as the lead-in and lead-out types.

5 Press the F1 Set Teach trace data key to confirm the pa-rameter entry.

Page 141: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

139

7

Executing the teach trace procedure

Introduction After specification of the teach trace parameters, the teach trace procedure can be started.

Status display During execution of the teach trace procedure, the following symbols on the screen showthe current status:

Reference point You can define a reference point before the actual teach trace procedure is started. This reference point is taken over into the part program as program zero. The reference point is necessary is you wish to pick up more than one closed contour.If you do not use a reference point, program zero and the lead-in starting point are identical.

Task definition You want to record a graphical contour pattern by means of the teach trace procedure and then save these specifications in the form of a part program.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

A graphical pattern of the contour is available within the machine area.

The machine is equipped with an optical tracing system.

The optical tracing system has been prepared for operation.

A blank has been put on and prepared for processing.

The teach trace parameters have been entered.

The 'Teach trace' view is displayed in the 'Manual Mode' area.

Procedure for defining the reference point

Perform the following steps in the given sequence if you wish to define a reference point:

continued on the next page

Symbol Significance

Searching contour

Found contour, tracing active

Lost contour

Contour closed

Step Action Control element

1 Position the tracer head of the optical tracing system at the desired position with the help of the joystick if you wish to define a reference point.

Page 142: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

140

7

Executing the teach trace procedure, continued

Procedure for defining the reference point, continued

Procedure of executing the teach trace proce-dure

Perform the following steps in the given sequence to execute the teach trace procedure:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control element

2 Press the F7 key Teach trace reference point to set the reference point.When executing the teach trace procedure, the defined reference point is then taken into the part program as program zero.

Step Action Control element

1 With the help of the joystick, position the tracer head of the optical tracing system close to the graphic which you want to record.

2 Press the F5 key Turn Left or F5 key Turn Right to define the turning direction after the contour was found.

3 Press the F1 key Start teach tracing to activate the teach trace procedure.The symbol field of the key flashes.

4 Use the joystick to indicate the direction of the graph-ic.The arrow of the direction indicator on the screen indi-cates the chosen direction.

Page 143: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

141

7

Executing the teach trace procedure, continued

Procedure of executing the teach trace procedure, continued

continued on the next page

Step Action Control element

5 Press the RUN key to initiate the teach trace proce-dure.The symbol field of the F1 key "Start teach tracing" is highlighted in color.The "Searching contour" symbol is displayed.The tracer head of the optical tracing system moves to-wards the graphic at half of the predefined speed searching for the contour.After the tracer head has found the contour of the graphical pattern, it follows the contour and records points at regular intervals which will then be processed to form a part program.The "Found contour, tracing active" symbol is dis-played.The contour is traced and recorded until the tracer head reaches the starting point of the tracing proce-dure.The "Contour closed" symbol is displayed.A status message with the text "Contour closed" is dis-played.

6 Press the F1 key OK to confirm the status message.

7 Press the F2 key Load part program to saved the re-corded contour as part program and confirm the status message.An input box opens.

8 Use the alphanumeric block, to enter the name under which you wish to save the new part program.

Page 144: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

142

7

Executing the teach trace procedure, continued

Procedure of executing the teach trace procedure, continued

Result You have recorded a graphical contour pattern with the help of the teach trace procedure and generated a part program according to these specifications.

Step Action Control element

9 Press the F1 OK key to confirm the input.

Page 145: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

143

7

Recording several closed contours

Introduction With the "Teach trace" function you can record several closed contours of a pattern and connect them to form a program. Here you can record all contours with the same parame-ters, select individual parameters for each contour or continue with recording another con-tour at a later point in time.

Task definition You want to record several closed contours of a pattern separately and one after the other and then connect the contours in a program.

Prerequisite You have recorded a contour together with a reference point and saved it as part pro-gram.

The "Teach trace" view in the "Manual mode" area is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

Result Several closed contours have been recorded and connected to a program in the order of their recording.

Note: The various contours will be connected to a part program in the order of their re-cording.

Step Action Control element

1 If you wish you can change the teach trace parameters, as described in section.Parameter entry for the teach trace mode, p. 137Maintain the name of the program recorded last under "Program name" in the dialog box "Entering teach trace parameters".

2 Record another contour as described in section.Executing the teach trace procedure, p. 139The reference point of the program recorded last is still ac-tivated.

Page 146: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Manual mode

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

144

7

Page 147: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Providing data

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

145

88

8 Providing and editing dataProvidingdata889.01.005500000.400.388-GBOper atinginstr ucti ons -Preli minary inf ormationVISION 55

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes how to create, edit, copy, delete and paste part programs and other data. The various editors are also described, such as the part program editor and the tech-nology data display. With the exception of the technology data display, all of these func-tions are bundled together in the 'Data' section.

Calling the data section Press the P1 key to call the 'Data' section.

What’s in this Chapter? This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section Topic Page

8.1 File manager 147

8.2 The part program editor 162

8.3 Technology data display 183

8.4 On-screen Timers and Counters 189

Page 148: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

146

8

Page 149: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

147

8

8.1 File manager

Overview

Introduction The file manager is used to manage the file system of the control, and thus enables you for example to delete or copy files. In addition, with the help of the file manager programs can be called for editing.

You can use the file manager to access directories and files via the following media:Local hard disks

Flash memory

USB devices (optional)

Network connection via Windows network

Network connection via FTP

Network connection via UDL

The file manager can also be used to display the following editors for the control:Part program editor (See The part program editor, p. 162)

Technology data display (See Technology data display, p. 183)

Job editor

Standard shape generator

Internal memory The control has internal memory in which standard shape programs, part programs and nested programs are stored. The internal memory is accessed through the file manager.The files stored in internal memory are preserved even after the control is turned off. Nev-ertheless, it is advisable to make backup copies of all programs stored in internal memory, in order to avoid loss of data.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Structure of the file manager 148

Renaming a file 151

Deleting a file 153

Creating a new file or directory 155

Copying a file 157

Cutting a file 158

Pasting a file 159

Execution of a file 160

Page 150: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

148

8

Structure of the file manager

Introduction The file manager has two separate views:Tree/symbol view

List view

With the help of the F1 "Display selection" you can exchange the focus between the two views.

The file manager is displayed; in this example the focus is on the list view:

Tree/symbol view The tree/symbol view on the left side shows the hierarchical structure of the file groups, directories and drives. Also indicated are the paths to which the directories refer. The paths of the file groups of the file manager can be changed with the help of the constant file FILM.kon (see Service Manual).

continued on the next page

Page 151: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

149

8

Structure of the file manager, continued

Tree/symbol view, continued

As an alternative to displaying the hierarchical structure in the tree view, the file groups can also be displayed as symbols.

The following four file groups are set up as the default setting:

List view The list view on the right side shows the files of the data source selected in the tree view (file group, drive, directory).Press the F5 "Reread" key to update the list view. The view is filled with the current infor-mation from the data source. This is important with changing media without automatic up-date, such as UDL.

continued on the next page

File group Significance

MPG Part programs

Shape Standard shape library

TDF Technology data

JOB Job files

Page 152: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

150

8

Structure of the file manager, continued

File suffixes The suffixes of the files displayed in the file manager have the following meanings:

Abbreviation Significance

MPG part program

CNC part program

FIX Standard shape library of ATAS

DGB Standard shape library of Digitron

TDF Technology data

JOB Job file

Page 153: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

151

8

Renaming a file

Introduction You can use the file manager to give new names to files such as part programs.

Task definition You wish to rename an existing file.

Prerequisite The basic view of the 'data' section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control ele-ment

1 Press the F1 Select view key if the focus is not on the tree view. A file group in the tree view is marked in colour.

2 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the group of files containing the part program that is to be deleted.

3 Press the Right cursor key to display subfolders of the filegroup, if necessary. The files in the folder are displayed in list view.

4 Press the F1 Select view key to switch the focus to the list view. One file in the list view is marked in colour.

5 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the file that is to be renamed.The desired file is marked in colour.

6 Press the Extended function menu key. The extended function menu is displayed.

7 Press the F2 Rename key. The file name is marked in colour and can now be edited.

8 Use the letter and number keys to enter the new name.

Page 154: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

152

8

Renaming a file, continued

Procedure, continued

Result The selected file has been renamed.

Step Action Control ele-ment

9 Confirm the entry by pressing the Enter key.

Page 155: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

153

8

Deleting a file

Introduction You can use the file manager to delete files such as part programs from selected directo-ries.

Task definition You would like to delete an existing file.

Prerequisite The basic view of the 'data' section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Note: The procedure described below deletes the file permanently. Create a backup copy first, if you are not certain whether you still need the file.

Step Action Control ele-ment

1 Press the F1 Select view key if the focus is not on the tree view. A file group in the tree view is marked in blue.

2 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the group of files containing the part program that is to be deleted.

3 Press the Right cursor key to display subdirectories of the file group, if necessary. The files in the folder are displayed in list view.

4 Press the F1 Select view key to switch the focus to the list view.One file in the list view is marked in colour.

5 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the file that is to be deleted.The desired file is marked in colour.

6 Press the Extended function menu key. The extended function menu is displayed.

7 Press the F8 Delete key. An information box is displayed with the question, whether the selected file is really to be deleted.

Page 156: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

154

8

Deleting a file, continued

Procedure, continued

Result The selected file has been deleted and now is no longer present.

Step Action Control ele-ment

8 Press the F1 Yes (Thumbs up!) key if this is the desired file. Press the F2 No (Thumbs down!) if this is not the desired file, and repeat steps 5 - 8. The selected file disappears from the list view.

Page 157: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

155

8

Creating a new file or directory

Introduction With the help of the file manager you can create a new, empty part program or a new, emp-ty directory.

Task definition You wish to create a new part program or a new subdirectory.

Prerequisite The basic view of the 'data' section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Note: Only part programs with the file format 'MPG' can be created.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F1 Select view key if the focus is not on the tree view. A file group in the tree view is marked in colour.

2 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the file group in which the file or directory is to be created.

3 Press the Right cursor key to display subdirectories of the file group, if necessary.

4 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the subdirec-tory in which the file or subdirectory is to be created.

5 Press the F1 Display selection key to switch the focus to the list view if you wish to create a file. Skip this step if you wish to create a directory.

6 Press the Extended function menu key. The extended function menu is displayed.

7 Press the F7 New file/folder key. An input box with the name "Creating a new folder" or "Creating a new file" is displayed.

8 Enter the name of the file or directory with the help of the letter and number keys.You do not need to enter a file suffix for the file. The suffix ".mpg" is created automatically.

Page 158: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

156

8

Creating a new file or directory, continued

Procedure, continued

Result You have created a new, empty file or a new, empty folder in the current directory.In the case of a file, the display automatically changes to the part program editor (See Thepart program editor, p. 162).

Step Action Control element

9 Confirm the input by pressing the F1 OK key.

Page 159: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

157

8

Copying a file

Introduction With the help of the file manager you can copy a file and paste it at a different location. In this process the original file remains unchanged, that is, after the copying process the cop-ied file exists in duplicate.

Task definition You wish to copy a file.

Prerequisite The basic view of the 'data' section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The file has been copied to the clipboad, and can now be pasted in with the help of the 'Paste (See Pasting a file, p. 159)' function at a different location, for example in a different directory. The original file remains intact.

Step Action Control ele-ment

1 Press the F1 Select view key if the focus is not on the tree view. A file group in the tree view is marked in colour.

2 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the group of files containing the part program that is to be deleted.

3 Press the Right cursor key to display a subdirectory of the file group, if necessary. The files in the directory are displayed in list view.

4 Press the F1 Select view key to switch the focus to the list view. One file in the list view is marked in colour.

5 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the file that is to be deleted.

6 Press the Extended function menu key. The extended function menu is displayed.

7 Press the F5 Copy key. The 'Paste' symbol appears in the function menu.

Page 160: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

158

8

Cutting a file

Introduction With the help of the file manager you can cut a file and paste it at a different location. In this process the original file is deleted; that is, after the cut file is pasted back in it does not exist in duplicate.

Task definition You wish to cut a file.

Prerequisite The basic view of the 'data' section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The file has been copied to the clipboad, and can now be pasted in with the help of the 'Paste (See Pasting a file, p. 159)' function at a different location, for example in a different folder. At the same time the original file is deleted.

Step Action Control ele-ment

1 Press the F1 Select view key if the focus is not on the tree view. A file group in the tree view is marked in colour.

2 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the group of files containing the part program that is to be deleted.

3 Press the Right cursor key to display subfolders of the file group, if necessary. The files in the folder are displayed in list view.

4 Press the F1 Select view key to switch the focus to the list view. One file in the list view is marked in colour.

5 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the file that is to be copied.

6 Press the Extended function menu key. The extended function menu is displayed.

7 Press the F6 Cut key. The 'Paste' symbol appears in the function menu.

Page 161: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

159

8

Pasting a file

Introduction With the help of the file manager you can paste a copied (See Copying a file, p. 157) or cut (See Cutting a file, p. 158) file at a different location.

Task definition You wish to paste a cut or copied file into a file group or directory.

Prerequisite The file manager is displayed.

A file has been copied or cut, and is thus on the clipboad of the control.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The file has been pasted into the selected directory and is displayed in the list view.

Step Action Control elements

1 Press the F1 Select view key if the focus is not on the tree view. A file group in the tree view is marked in colour.

2 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the file group into which you want to paste the copied or cut file.

3 Press the Right cursor key to display subdirectories of the file group, if necessary.

4 Press the Extended function menu key until the function symbol paste appears at position F4. If the function symbol 'paste' is not present, there is no copied or cut file on the clipboard of the control.

5 Press the F4 Paste key to paste the copied or cut file.

Page 162: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

160

8

Execution of a file

Introduction You can use the file manager to select a file, such as a part program, for execution. De-pending on the particular data type, the matching editor for the file selected in the list view is activated automatically, for example the part program editor.

File types File types and corresponding editors that are opened for editing:

Task definition You wish to edit a selected file.

Prerequisite The basic view of the data section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

File suffix File type Editor

MPG part program Part program editor (See The part program edi-tor, p. 162)

CNC part program Part program editor (See The part program edi-tor, p. 162)

JOB Job file Job editor

FIX Standard shape pro-gram

Standard shape generator

TDF Technology file Technology data display (See Technology data display, p. 183)

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F1 Select view key if the focus is not on the tree view.A file group in the tree view is marked in colour.

2 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the group of files containing the part program that is to be edited.

3 Press the Right cursor key to display subdirecto-ries of the file group, if necessary. The files in the directory are displayed in list view.

4 Press the F1 Select view key to switch the focus to the list view. One file in the list view is marked in colour.

5 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the file that is to be edited.

Page 163: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

161

8

Execution of a file, continued

Procedure, continued

Result The editor that matches the selected file is opened for editing.

Step Action Control element

6 Press the F2 Edit key.

Page 164: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

162

8

8.2 The part program editor

Overview

Introduction The following chapter describes the control's part program editor.Existing part programs can be changed with the help of the part program editor and newly created part programs with the help of the file manager. For this purpose, the program code of the part program can be adjusted.Part programs can be displayed on text basis as well as graphically. In text display, only the program code is displayed. In graphical display, the program code is displayed together with a program visualization in a coordinate system. A zoom function has been integrated for detailed viewing in graphical display.

Calling the part pro-gram editor

The part program editor can be called with the help of the file manager (See Execution of a file, p. 160).

Formats Program code in EIA-RS DIN66025 and ESSI formats can be edited and displayed graph-ically.Program code in SDP and ORG formats can only be edited in the part program editor but not displayed graphically.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Section Topic Page

8.2.1 The basics of the part program editor 164

8.2.2 The functions of the part program editor 171

Page 165: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

163

8

Page 166: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

164

8

8.2.1 The basics of the part program editor

Overview

Introduction This section provides basic information which you require for using the part program editor. It includes a description of the structure of the part program editor as well as explanatory notes on the structure of part programs and the data formats to be used.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Structure of the part program editor 165

Part programs 167

Formats of part programs 170

Page 167: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

165

8

Structure of the part program editor

Introduction Program code and a graphical display of the part program can be displayed in the part pro-gram editor. For this purpose, a program code view and a graphical view is integrated in the part program editor.

Views With the help of the F1 function "Text/Graphic" you can switch between the program code view and the graphical view at any time. The program code view is defined as basic setting.

When the graphical view is activated, the graphic shows the part program editor:

The table names the graphic elements:

Program code display When the program code view is activated the entire window is used for displaying the pro-gram code. The program lines are numbered consecutively in a six-digit line number dis-play with gray background, and displayed line-by-line like the part program. Depending on the process function, the program lines are displayed in different colors. The colors corre-spond to the process colors defined in the Options section. The advantage of the program code view is that also longer program lines can be displayed completely.

Graphical display When the graphical view is activated, the program code is displayed in a scaled down frame while the geometry data of the respective programmed object is displayed true to scale in a coordinate system to the right of the frame.

continued on the next page

Number Designation

1 Program code

2 Graphical representation

Page 168: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

166

8

Structure of the part program editor, continued

Graphical display, continuedThe advantage of the graphical view is that the direct interconnection of program code and graphical display of the part program becomes visible. When the cursor is in a certain pro-gram line, the corresponding area of the part program is highlighted in color in the graphical display.

Page 169: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

167

8

Part programs

Introduction Part programs are programmed contours which can be used to process blanks. These pro-grams consist of various elements such as straight lines, curves, etc.

Coordinate system An XY coordinate system is the basis for all dimensions in a part program. It is a standard coordinate system (See Coordinate system, p. 102), rotated counterclockwise by 90 de-grees.

The following graphic shows such a coordinate system:

Program components A part program consists of path information and auxiliary functions. The path information is described by means of coordinates. Only by complementing the path information with the auxiliary functions an executable program can be created.In addition, commentary lines can be inserted into the part program to describe the pro-gram code for example. This, however, is not necessarily an essential part of a part pro-gram.

Formal presentation A program line can contain either an auxiliary function or path information for the next movement of the tool.The auxiliary functions are placed before the related path information.The programs are processed sequentially, i.e. programming must be done according to the sequence of work steps. In order to do so, the contour of a workpiece is divided into indi-vidual elements.Example of a part program:5++200+200+6297+1000+

Page 170: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

168

8

continued on the next page

Page 171: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

169

8

Part programs, continued

Formal presentation, continued++1000-1000--500++--100083862

Absolute/incremental Programming can take place in absolute machine coordinates as well as incremental.In incremental programming, the programmed geometry (coordinate values) relates to the starting point of the geometric element.In absolute programming, the coordinate values have a common reference point, program zero.

Formats of the part pro-grams

Programming of the part programs can be done in both the ESSI format as well as the EIA format.

Page 172: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

170

8

Formats of part programs

Introduction Programming of the part programs can be done in both the ESSI format as well as the EIA format. The default setting is the ESSI format.

ESSI format Programming is done using numbers and the characters "+" and "-". Letters are not used. These programs are free of addresses, i.e. the data are processed following the pro-grammed sequence. The contour of a workpiece is programmed in individual elements (straight lines, circles and circular arcs).Each element is programmed individually without reference to the other elements.Programming takes place from starting point to end point of an element. The end point of an element is at the same time the starting point of the next element (relative program-ming). The type of the element is defined by the number of signs within a program line (2 signs: straight line, 5 signs: circle (circular arc)). In incremental programming, all signs and coordinates of a program line refer to the starting point of the respective element, in abso-lute programming the zero point of the coordinate system is used as a basis.

EIA format Programming in the EIA format enables stepwise programming as well as programming in absolute coordinates.Programming is done using letters, numbers and the characters "+" and "-".The system differentiates between G codes for path information and M codes for auxiliary functions.In incremental programming, all signs and coordinates refer to the starting point of the re-spective element, in absolute programming the zero point of the coordinate system is used as a basis.

Note: You will find a detailed description of the ESSI format with an auxiliary function ta-ble and programming examples in the "Programming instructions".

Note: You will find a detailed description of the EIA format with an auxiliary function table and programming examples in the "Programming instructions".

Page 173: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

171

8

8.2.2 The functions of the part program editor

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes the functions of the part program editor. Program code of the part program can be created anew, changed, scanned, deleted and stored. In addition, the fad-ing-in of program graphic and comments is included in the scope of functions.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Finding characters in program code 172

Replacing of characters in the program code 174

Copying and pasting program code 176

Cutting and pasting program code 177

Line-by-line navigation in program code 178

Deleting lines in program code 179

Enlargement of segments in the graphical display of part programs 180

Saving part programs 182

Page 174: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

172

8

Finding characters in program code

Introduction The functions "Find" and "Find next" in the part program editor can be used to search for characters and character strings in the program code of a part program.

Task definition You wish to find and select a certain character string within a part program.

Prerequisite The part program editor is displayed.

The part program to be processed is open.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F2 key Find.

The "Find" dialog box is displayed.

2 Use the letter and number keys to enter the desired character string in the "String" text box.

3 Use the Tab key to select the "Find entire line" check box if you want to find lines which consist of the spec-ified character string only.In this case, activate "Find entire line" check box with the key combination Shift + 0.

Page 175: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

173

8

Finding characters in program code, continued

Procedure , continued

Result The sought-after character string was found and highlighted. It can now be edited further, i.e. deleted (See Deleting lines in program code, p. 179), cut out (See Cutting and pasting program code , p. 177) or copied (See Copying and pasting program code , p. 176).

Step Action Control element

4 Press the F1 key Find next to initiate the search pro-cess.If the string exists, the character or the line is high-lighted. The line in which the string was found is indi-cated under "Status" in the "Find" dialog box.

If the character string cannot be found, the text "String not found" is displayed under "Status" in the "Find" di-alog box.

5 Press the F1 key Find next again to continue the search and find out whether the string exists more of-ten.Repeat this procedure until the character string has been found and highlighted at the desired position in the program.

Page 176: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

174

8

Replacing of characters in the program code

Introduction The function 'Replace' can be used to replace characters or character strings in a part pro-gram's program code with other characters or character strings.Here either all characters which comply with the selection criteria can be replaced simulta-neously in a single step or individual characters or character strings can be found and re-placed with the help of a search function.

The function can be used different ways:limited to a highlighted section

throughout the program code of a part program.

Task definition You wish to replace a character or a character string with another.

Prerequisite The part program editor is displayed.

The program to be processed is open.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F4 key Replace....

The "Replace" dialog box is displayed.

2 Use the alphanumeric block to enter the character string to be replaced in the top text box "Replace" and the new character string in the bottom text box "with".

Page 177: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

175

8

Replacing of characters in the program code, continued

Procedure, continued

Result A character or a character string has been replaced with another one according to your specifications.

Step Action Control element

3 Use the Tab key and the key combination Shift + 0 to highlight the check box "Entire line" if you only want to re-place a character string when it represents a complete line and not only part of a line.

4 Select one of the options offered under the "Selection" ra-dio button.

5 Proceed with Step 6 if you do not want to replace all of the character strings in a part program which comply with your selection criteria. If you wish to simultaneously replace all of the character strings which comply with your selection criteria, press the F3 key Replace all.All of the complying character strings are replaced and the "Replace" dialog is closed.

6 If you only want to replace a certain character string of those found, continue pressing the F1 key Find next until the desired character string or the entire line (depends on configura-tion), has been highlighted.There is an indication of the number of times the sought-after character string was found.If no corresponding character string can be found, the "String not found" message is displayed.

7 Press the F2 key Replace.The "Replace" dialog is closed and the highlighted charac-ter string is replaced with the new one.

Page 178: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

176

8

Copying and pasting program code

Introduction With the help of the "Copy" and "Paste" functions you can select program code in a part program and insert it at a different location.

Task definition You want to copy characters/character strings of the program code and paste them in at a different location of the part program.

Prerequisite The part program editor is displayed.

The part program to be processed is open.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result You have copied a character string of a part program's program code and pasted it in at a different location of the part program.

Step Action Control element

1 Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the place of the character to be copied or to the beginning of the character string to be copied.

2 Highlight the character to be copied with the key combination Shift + cursor key Right.The selected characters are emphasized in color.

3 Press the F5 key Copy to copy the selected text.

4 Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the place where you wish to insert the selected program code.

5 Press the F5 key Paste to insert the copied text.

Page 179: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

177

8

Cutting and pasting program code

Introduction With the help of the "Cut" and "Paste" functions you can cut out program code in a part program and paste it back in at a different location.

Prerequisite The part program editor is displayed.

The program to be processed is open.

Task definition You want to cut out characters/character strings of the program code and paste it in at a different location of the part program.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result You have cut out a character string of a part program's program code and pasted in at a different location of the part program.

Step Action Control element

1 Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the place of the character to be cut out or to the beginning of the character string to be cut out.

2 Select the character to be cut out with the key combination Shift + cursor key Right.The selected characters are emphasized in color.

3 Press the F6 key Cut to delete the selected characters and copy them to the clipboard.

4 Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the place where you wish to insert the selected program code.

5 Press the F5 key Paste to insert the characters cut out.

Page 180: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

178

8

Line-by-line navigation in program code

Introduction With the help of the "Go to" you can navigate to any desired line in a part program's code.

Task definition You wish to move to a certain line within the program code of a part program.

Prerequisite The part program editor is displayed.

The program to be processed is open.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The desired line has been highlighted and can be edited now.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F5 key Go to.

The "Go to program line" input box is displayed.

2 Use the number and letter keys to enter the num-ber of the desired program line in the "Program line" text box.

3 Press the F1 key OK for confirmation.The cursor is positioned at the end of the program line selected. At the same time, the line is highlight-ed.

Page 181: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

179

8

Deleting lines in program code

Introduction With the help of the "Delete line" function you can delete one or more lines in sequencefrom the code of a part program.

Task definition You wish to delete several consecutive lines in the program code of a part program.

Prerequisite The part program editor is displayed.

The part program to be processed is open.

Procedure Perform the following steps to delete more than one program line:

Result The desired lines have been deleted. The program can now be edited further and saved.

Step Action Control element

1 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to move the cursor to the top line of the program lines to be deleted.

2 Highlight the program lines to be deleted with the key com-bination Shift + cursor key Right.The selected lines are emphasized in color.

3 Now press the F8 key Delete line.All of the highlighted lines of the part program are deleted.

Page 182: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

180

8

Enlargement of segments in the graphical display of part programs

Introduction With the help of the "Zoom" and "Activate zoom" functions, segments of the graphical dis-play of the part program can be enlarged.

Task definition You wish to enlarge a segment of the program graphic and afterwards return to the original presentation.

Prerequisite The part program editor is displayed.

The part program to be processed is open.

The graphical display has been selected.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Note: In order to use the zoom function the graphical display of a part program has to first be activated with F1 "Graphic".

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F5 key Zoom.A zoom window is displayed as frame in a predefined size at the position of program zero. The symbol field of the F5 function "Zoom" is highlighted in color. Additionally the F6 function "Activate zoom" is now available.

2 Position the zoom window with the help of the cursor keysin the segment of the part program's graphical display that you wish to enlarge.

3 Adjust the size of the zoom window with the key combination Shift + cursor keys.

4 Press the F6 key Activate zoom.The segment selected is displayed in an enlarged view and the symbol field of the F6 function "Activate zoom" is high-lighted in color.

5 Press the F5 key Zoom again.The part program is displayed graphically in an overall view again. The symbol field of the F5 function "Zoom" is dis-played in normal view again.

Page 183: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

181

8

Enlargement of segments in the graphical display of part programs, continued

Result You have selected a segment of a part program's graphical display, enlarged it and then returned to the normal presentation again.

Page 184: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

182

8

Saving part programs

Introduction After you have made changes to a part program, you have to save it if you want to take over the changes. With the help of the "Save" function you can store modified part pro-grams.

Task definition You wish to store a modified part program.

Prerequisite The part program editor is displayed.

A part program has been modified and is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The part program has been stored under the specified name.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the Level back key.The "Save under" dialog box is displayed for storing the part program. The name of the modified part program is displayed in the "File name" text box.

2 If you want to overwrite the previous part program, pro-ceed with Step 3.If you wish to store the modified part program under a dif-ferent name, enter the desired program name with the help of the letter and number keys in the "File name" text box.

3 Press the OK key to confirm the name of the part program.

Page 185: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

183

8

8.3 Technology data display

Overview

Introduction Technology data is the generic term for technology parameters, technology files and tech-nology records. Process-related procedures are controlled with the help of the technology data. The totality of all technology data contains the parameters for the various processes present on a machine. These are various settings for times, pressures, distances etc. for processes such as plasma, oxy fuel, marking, etc.With the help of the technology data display you can display, load, change and store tech-nology data.

Technology file A technology data file always contains exactly one technology record, and is stored on the control as a TDF file.

Technology record A technology record contains all of the settings for a particular process. These are times, pressures, distances and other values that are assigned to a particular process, such as for example the current setting for a plasma process. But also specifications that differ only in their amount, such as the time parameter for lifting the tool, are recorded in a technology record. For each process that exists on the machine, at least one technology record must be se-lected. A value setting in a technology record is called a technology parameter.

Technology parameter The smallest unit of the technology package is a technology parameter. A technology pa-rameter defines a value setting for a process. This can be for example the ignition time of the oxy fuel process or the current for the plasma process.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Structure of the technology data display 184

Loading a technology record 185

Changing a technology parameter 186

Save changed technology record 188

Page 186: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

184

8

Structure of the technology data display

Introduction In the technology data display, the active technology record is displayed with the individual technology parameters. The active technology record is the record with which the machine is working at the moment, and whose data are accessible to the PLC program. Above the two general technology parameters are two general lines of description. They specify the content of the technology record more precisely, and cannot be changed.

Display of the technolo-gy parameters

The technology parameters are displayed a line at a time. Each line consists of a bar field that shows the current technology parameter as a "fill level" within its defined limits. In the background of the bar field, the technology parameter is depicted numerically with its unit. To the right of the bar field the technology parameter is described in words. The descrip-tions cannot be changed, but the technology parameters can be changed within their limits.

Navigating in the pa-rameter window

A technology parameter is selected either by rotating the handwheel or by pressing the "Up" and "Down" cursor keys.

Number of simulta-neously loaded TDF files

A maximum of ten technology records, i.e. TDF files, can be loaded. If there are already ten files loaded and an additional file is loaded (manually or by a part program), the file that has not been used for the longest is automatically closed. No message is issued.

Status information In the status line at the bottom edge of the screen additional information about the currently selected technology parameter is displayed. In the first field from the left, the process num-ber belonging to the active technology record is displayed. The second and third fields dis-play the editing limits of the currently selected technology parameter.

Display of other tech-nology parameter infor-mation

If service mode is turned on, when the Enter key is pressed the information from the inter-pretation data (xxDEFINE.TEC) belonging to the selected technology parameter is dis-played. If the service mode is not turned on, this information is not displayed.

Display image file Every technology record can have an image file (graphic information about nozzle and ma-terial) assigned to it. This image file is displayed by pressing the F6 "Display image" key. The function can only be selected if the corresponding technology record contains a refer-ence to an image.

Note: A file is considered 'used' if its content is displayed, edited or activated. TDF files that contain the selected technology record of a process are not removed.

Page 187: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

185

8

Loading a technology record

Introduction With the help of this function you can load a TDF file and the technology record which it contains. The newly loaded technology record is assigned automatically to the corresponding pro-cess. The technology record previously assigned to that process remains loaded as long as the maximum number of loadable files is not exceeded, but is no longer activated when switching to the corresponding process.

Task definition You wish to load another technology record.

Prerequisite A process has been selected

The technology data display is shown.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result An additional TDF file has been loaded. If the corresponding process is active, the technol-ogy record from this file is displayed and the data of the technology record are directly avail-able to the control.

Note: Reloading the same file resets previously modified values back to the values indi-cated in the file.

Step Action Control ele-ment

1 Press the F5 Load technology record key to load a tech-nology record.The selection box "Opening a file..." is displayed. The direc-tory for TDF files or the most recently used directory is used as the file path.

2 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the desired TDF file.

3 Confirm the selection by pressing the F1 OK key.

Page 188: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

186

8

Changing a technology parameter

Introduction With the help of the handwheel, you can change the technology parameters of the active technology record within the given limits. If a technology parameter has a very wide range of values, as an alternative you can also change it by entering the new value directly.

Task definition You wish to change an existing technology parameter.

Prerequisite A process has been selected

The technology data display is shown.

A technology record is opened.

Procedure with the help of the handwheel

If only relatively small changes of the technology parameter are involved, perform the fol-lowing steps in the indicated order:

Procedure with direct value input

If a larger change of the technology parameter is involved, perform the following steps in the indicated order:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control element

1 Choose the desired technology parameter by rotating the handwheel, or by pressing the Up and Down cur-sor keys.The description of the selected technology parameter is highlighted in colour.

2 Press the F2 Change value key and at the same time rotate thehandwheel until the desired value is reached. +

Step Action Control element

1 Choose the desired technology parameter by rotating the handwheel, or by pressing the Up and Down cursor keys.The description of the selected technology parameter is highlighted in colour.

2 Press the Enter key.An input box opens.

Page 189: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

187

8

Changing a technology parameter, continued

Procedure with direct value input, continued

Result The desired technology parameter has been changed.

Step Action Control element

3 Now use the number keys to enter the new value.

4 Confirm the input by pressing the F1 OK key.

Note: The changes to a technology parameter are not saved in the original technology record file. They are preserved as long as the file is loaded and the control is not turnedoff. When the control is turned off, all changes to the selected technology records are stored in a separate file.

Page 190: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

188

8

Save changed technology record

Introduction Changed technology records can be saved with the help of this function.

Task definition You wish to save a technology record after you have changed it.

Prerequisite A process has been selected

The technology data display is shown.

A technology record is open and has been changed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The changed technology record has been stored.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F7 Save key to save the changed technology record.An input box opens.

2 Using the alphanumeric block, enter the name under which you wish to save the changed technology record.

3 Press the F1 OK key to confirm the input. The input box closes.

Page 191: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

189

8

8.4 On-screen Timers and Counters

Overview

Introduction With the help of this function, selected machine data can be displayed and saved. The ma-chine data are either counter or timer data. Counters can display either a number of events (event counter) or a distance covered (length counter).By capturing these machine data, the operator can carry out maintanance work or replace expendables in good time.

The graphic shows the machine data display:

Extended function Up to 24 different timers/counters can be monitored if the optional function "On-screen tim-ers and counters - extended" has been purchased. If this function has not been purchased only six different timers/counters can be monitored.

Typical machine data Typical machine data that can be displayed are for example: Process run time

Machine run time

Jet downtime

Lubrication plan

continued on the next page

Page 192: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

190

8

Overview, continued

Typical machine data, continued

Machine idle time

Number of ignitions per nozzle

Resetting values The displayed values can be reset to the initial value by the operator.

Limit A limit can be defined for all machine data displayed. It generates a message when it is exceeded and in this way calls for maintanance work or the replacement of expendables.

Adjusting a function Output messages and type of captured data can be defined and adjusted in the "timer.tre" and "timer.ini" files. The structure and editing of these files is described in the service man-ual.

Calling the machine data display

Perform the following steps in the given sequence to call the machine data display:

Table The following table explains the columns of the machine data display:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control element

1 Press the key combination Shift + P2 Options.The "Options" section is displayed.

2 Press the F3 key DDE.The "DDE related functions" view is displayed. The ma-chine data display is activated automatically.

Column Significance

Description This column is used to specify the name of the counter/timer de-fined in the "timer.ini" file.

Length In the case of a length counter, this column indicates the cur-rently captured value in meters or inches with a maximum of 3 decimal places each.

Time In the case of a timer, this column indicates the currently cap-tured value in hours:minutes:seconds.

Number In the case of an event counter, this column indicates the cur-rently captured value.

Marker This column indicates the machine data to which the counter/timer refers.

Page 193: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

191

8

Overview, continued

Symbols The following table explains the symbols of the machine data display:

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Symbol Significance

The display is automatically reset to the defined initial value when the limit has been reached.

The display can be reset to the defined initial value by the operator.

Topic Page

Resetting a counter/timer 192

Setting a new limit 193

Page 194: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

192

8

Resetting a counter/timer

Introduction The displayed values can be reset to the initial value by the operator.

Task definition You wish to reset a counter or timer to it's initial value.

Prerequisites The machine data are displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The selected counter/timer is reset to it's initial value.

Note: The initial value is defined in the "timer.ini" file which is described in the service manual.

Step Action Control element

1 Use the cursor keys or the handwheel to select a counter/timer.

2 Press the F5 key Reset machine data.An inquiry box is displayed.

3 Press the F1 OK key to confirm the reset-ting.

Page 195: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

193

8

Setting a new limit

Introduction A limit can be defined for each machine data displayed. It generates a message when it is exceeded. This message is displayed once when the limit has been exceeded. This message is also displayed each time the machine is started as long as the limit has not been changed and the counter/timer has not been reset.

Task definition You want to set a new limit.

Prerequisite The Service mode is activated.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result A new limit has been set.

Note: The limit is deactivated when it is set to zero, i.e. no message is displayed.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F6 key Set limit to set the limit.An input box is displayed.

2 Use the letter and number keys to enter the new limit.

3 Press the F1 key Set limit to confirm the entries.

Page 196: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Providing data

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

194

8

Page 197: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Preparing & executing programs

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

195

99

9 Prepare and execute part programsPreparing& executingprograms989.01.005500000.400.388-GBOpera tingins tructions-Prelimin a ry info rma tionVISION55

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes how you can prepare part programs for execution and then execute them. Program execution also includes the topic of interrupting the program during execu-tion.

Automatic mode sec-tion

The functions for preparing and executing part programs are summarized in the "Automatic mode" section. Press the P2 'Automatic' key to call the automatic section.

What’s in this Chapter? This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section Topic Page

9.1 Fundamentals of automatic mode 196

9.2 Program preparation options 198

9.3 Program execution 206

9.4 Interrupting/continuing part programs 209

Page 198: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

196

9

9.1 Fundamentals of automatic mode

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes the basic functions of automatic mode.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Switching the program display 197

Page 199: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

197

9

Switching the program display

Introduction In automatic mode, the display on the left half of the screen can be switched among various views.

The following displays are available:Machine coordinates

Program coordinates

Speed

Program

Parameters

Program time

Task definition You wish to switch the display in automatic mode.

Prerequisite The basic view of the automatic mode is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result You have selected all five possible displays one after the other.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F1 Display selection key.The "Switching the coordinate displays" window appears. The machine coordinate display is shown.

2 Press the F2 Program coordinates key.The axis coordinates are displayed, referenced to the ma-chine.

3 Press the F3 Speed key.The current axis speeds are displayed.

4 Press the F4 Program key.The program code is displayed.

5 Press the F5 Parameter key.The current program parameters are displayed.

6 Press the F6 Program time key.The estimated program or process running times are dis-played.

Page 200: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

198

9

9.2 Program preparation options

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes the various options for program preparation.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Overview of the part program parameters 199

Enter parameters 201

Select program options 202

Define strap bridge 203

Page 201: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

199

9

Overview of the part program parameters

Introduction This section explains the part program parameters that can be entered for a part program.

The part program parameters are divided into the following three groups:Parameters

Repetitions

Belt drive

The 'Parameters' group The 'Parameters' group has the following input possibilities:Feed

Kerf

Scale

Blank rotation

Program rotation

Feed This value determines the feed rate at which the part program is executed. During program execution the speed can only be changed by means of the feed potentiometer.

Kerf This value determines the kerf with which the part program is executed. The kerf can no longer be changed during execution.

Scale This value determines the size at which the part program is executed. A value of 1000 corresponds to the ratio 1:1, i.e. the program is executed at the original size.A value of 500 corresponds to the ratio 1:2, i.e. the program is reduced in size by half.A value of 2000 corresponds to the ratio 2:1, i.e. the program is twice the programmed size.

Blank rotation This value determines the rotation of the part program to compensate for a blank that is lying askew on the workholding table. The rotation is made around the lower right corner of the blank for all repetitions. The angle of this rotation can either be entered directly or can be determined automatically with the function "Manual blank alignment."

continued on the next page

Note: Programmed speeds in the program or in the technology package overwrite this value.

Note: Programmed kerf values overwrite the input values.

Page 202: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

200

9

Overview of the part program parameters, continued

Program rotation Rotation of the individual part program around the program zero point. The direction of ro-tation is counter-clockwise. This function is employed to achieve better utilization of the blank when executing individual programs.

The 'Repetitions' group The 'Repetitions' group has the following input possibilities:Number

Interval

Direction

Number This value determines the number of executions of a part program, so that the object beingexecuted can be created several times in one production step. By entering the repetitions in the X and Y directions separately, the raster arrangement of the repeated objects can be adapted optimally to an existing blank. The second, third etc. repetitions of the program can be to the left or right of the first pro-gram:0 = repetition on the left side1 = repetition on the right sideand/orbelow or above the first program:0 = repetition above the first program1 = repetition below the first program.

Interval To define the repetition offset, a rectangle known as a container is placed around the pre-scribed program. The interval to be entered is the distance between the containers. If the offset is zero, the containers are directly adjacent; with a negative offset they overlap.

Direction

The 'Belt drive' group The 'Belt drive' group has the following input possibilities:Starting block number

Repetition counter

Starting block number The line number at which the processing begins. In the normal case this value is 1, so that processing begins at line 1.

Repetition counter

Page 203: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

201

9

Enter parameters

Introduction This section describes the entering of parameters for modifying part programs. The indi-vidual parameters are described under Overview of the part program parameters, p. 199.

Task definition You wish to enter the parameters of a part program.

Prerequisite A part program has been selected.

The basic view of the automatic mode is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

Result The parameters have been entered; the part program is now modified and can be started.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F3 Parameter key.The input box 'Parameter input' appears.

2 Use the Tab key to select the check box for the parameter that you wish to modify.

3 Use the letter and number keys to enter the desired value.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all desired parameters are mod-ified.

5 Press the F1 OK key to confirm the entries.The basic view of the automatic mode is again displayed.

Page 204: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

202

9

Select program options

Introduction This section describes the selection of options for modifying part programs. The individual options are described under'Overview of the options.'

Task definition You wish to select the options of a part program.

Prerequisite A part program has been selected.

The basic view of the automatic mode is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

Result The options for the chosen part program have been selected.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F4 Options key.The input box "Option entry" appears.

2 Use the Tab key to select the check box for the option that you wish to select.

3 Press the F2 Option selection/deselection key to mark the selected option.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all desired options are marked.

5 Press the F1 Accept the option key to confirm the entries.The basic view of the automatic mode is again displayed.

Page 205: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

203

9

Define strap bridge

Introduction To prevent workpieces from falling out during the cutting process or to prevent large work-pieces from twisting, strap bridges can be produced. A strap bridge is a short piece of the contour that is left uncut. The operator specifies the length of the strap bridge and the length of the cut. The operator initiates the strap bridge during cutting. The control automatically ends the cutting process, moves along the contour the prescribed length of the strap bridge, and then moves the pre-scribed lead-in into the remnant blank. From there a lead-in is performed, and then cutting on the contour continues.

Length of the strap bridge

If the value for the length is zero, no strap bridge is generated.

Length of the lead-in If the lead-in length of the strap bridge is zero, the torch is ignited on the contour. If the lead-in length is not zero, the machine moves to the lead-in position, which is derived from the type of lead-in. Ignition of the torch takes place outside of the contour.

Type of lead-in You can choose between the following lead-in types for the strap bridge:a) perpendicularIn this case the lead-in is a straight line that meets the contour at a 90° angle.b) circularIn this case the lead-in is a quarter-circle arc.

The graphic shows the two types of lead-in:

The table names the elements of the graphic:

continued on the next page

Note: The same dialog box is also used for entering the parameters of a blank lock.

Number Designation

1 Lead-in position

2 Contour

Page 206: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

204

9

Define strap bridge, continued

Type of lead-in, continued

Task definition You wish to specify the length and lead-in length for generating strap bridges.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

A part program has been selected.

The basic view of the automatic mode is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Number Designation

3 Blank

Step Action Control element

1 Press the Extended function menu key.The extended function menu is displayed.

2 Press the F1 Strap bridge key.A dialog box for entering the strap bridge parameters opens. The focus is on the input field for the length of the strap bridge.

3 Using the number and letter block, enter the length of the strap bridge.

4 With the help of the Tab key, change to the text box for the length of the strap bridge lead-in.

5 Using the number and letter block, enter the length of the strap bridge lead-in.

Page 207: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

205

9

Define strap bridge, continued

Procedure, continued

Result You have defined the strap bridge parameters for the selected program. During processing of the program, strap bridges can now be created according to the above specifications at the press of a key.

Step Action Control element

6 With the help of the Tab key, change to the selection field for the strap bridge lead-in.

7 Use the Up and Down keys to select the type of strap bridge lead-in.

8 Press the F1 Accept key to confirm the entered param-eters.

Page 208: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

206

9

9.3 Program execution

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes how to execute part programs.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Open part program in the automatic section 207

Produce strap bridge 208

Page 209: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

207

9

Open part program in the automatic section

Introduction A stored part program can be opened not only with the help of the file manager, but also in automatic mode.

Task definition You wish to open a part program in automatic mode.

Prerequisite The basic view of the automatic mode is displayed.

Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The selected part program is opened and can be started.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the F2 Load file key.A dialog box for selecting a part program is displayed.

2 Use the TAB key to change to the tree view of the dialog box.

3 Use the Up and Down keys to select the group of files containing the part program that is to be opened.

4 Press the Right key to display subfolders of the file group, if necessary. The files in the folder are displayed in list view.

5 Use the TAB key to change to the list view of the dialog box.

6 Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the file that is to be opened.The desired file is marked in colour.

7 Press the F1 OK key to open the part program.

Page 210: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

208

9

Produce strap bridge

Introduction To prevent workpieces from falling out during the cutting process or to prevent large work-pieces from twisting, strap bridges can be produced. A strap bridge is a short piece of the contour that is left uncut. The operator specifies the length of the strap bridge and the length of the cut. The operator initiates the strap bridge during cutting. The control automatically ends the cutting process, moves along the contour the prescribed length of the strap bridge, and then moves the pre-scribed lead-in into the remnant blank. From there a lead-in is performed, and then cutting on the contour continues. After the cutting is ended, the workpiece must be separated from the remnant blank man-ually with hand torches.

Task definition You wish to produce one or more strap bridges.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

The strap bridge parameters have been entered.

A part program is currently executed.

The basic view of the automatic mode is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result One or more strap bridges have been produced. The part program has been properly end-ed.

Step Action Control element

1 Wait while the part program is executed until the tool has arrived at the place on the contour at which you wish to pro-duce a strap bridge.

2 Press the F2 Strap bridge key.The control automatically ends the cutting process. The tool moves along the contour the prescribed length of the strap bridge, and then moves the prescribed lead-in into the remnant blank. From there a lead-in is performed, and then cutting on the contour continues.

3 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to produce additional strap bridges.

Page 211: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

209

9

9.4 Interrupting/continuing part programs

Overview

Introduction A part program can be interrupted during execution and then continued again. This chapter describes the various possibilities for interrupting a program and continuing it again after the interruption.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Reverse processing direction 210

Page 212: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Preparing & executing programs

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

210

9

Reverse processing direction

Introduction The function "Reverse processing direction" offers you the possibility of reversing the di-rection of processing during the execution of a part program. The processing is interrupted for this purpose. This function is utilized for example to re-execute certain blocks of a part program when the tool has paused briefly.

Task definition You wish to reverse the processing direction during the processing of a part program, pro-cess the workpiece in the opposite direction, interrupt again and switch back to the original processing direction.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

A part program is being executed.

The automatic section is displayed.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The processing direction was reversed and then switched back to the original processing direction.

Step Action Control ele-ment

1 Press the STOP key.The execution of the part program is interrupted.

2 Press the F5 Forward/Back key.The key symbol is highlighted in colour.

3 Press the RUN key.The processing is resumed. The tool moves in the opposite direction.

4 Repeat steps 1 - 3 to process the part program again in the original direction.

Page 213: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Processes

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

211

1010

10 ProcessesProcesses1089.01.005500000. 400.388-GBOperati ngi nst ruct ions-Prelimi nar yinformat ionVISION 55

Overview

Introduction A process designates the type of processing that is carried out on a blank. A process is defined by the sum of all data (times, pressures, etc.), that are necessary for this type of processing.

Calling the processes section

All process-related functions are bundled in the processes section. Press the P4 Process key to call the processes section.

Process selection It is possible that the machine to which the control belongs has several processes. Only processes that are actually available on the machine are displayed. Please see the ma-chine manual for which process is the right one for your needs. The chosen process is al-ways displayed in the process window, at the upper left next to the process window symbol. When the control is restarted, the chosen process and the active stations are loaded in ac-cordance with the last setting. After a station start-up (station constant download) there is no longer any process selected.

Process functions The control has generally available functions and process-related functions. The generally available functions are the same for every process, while the process-related functions dif-fer depending on the process.

What’s in this Chapter? This Chapter contains the following Sections:

continued on the next page

CAUTION

Always observe the safety instructions for the individual processes, given in the machine manual.

Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equipment dam-age.

Section Topic Page

10.1 Generally available functions 213

10.2 Carriage clamping 217

Page 214: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

212

10

Overview, continued

What’s in this Chapter?, continued

Section Topic Page

10.3 Oxy fuel process 223

10.4 Plasma process 226

Page 215: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

213

10

10.1 Generally available functions

Overview

Introduction Independent of the selected process, some functions in the process section are always available to you.

General functions These are the functions:Add upStart up all stations

Automatic height adjustmentAutomatic torch height control

Height control at creep feedCreep feed for manual height adjustment on/off

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Automatic torch height control 214

Creep speed for height control 215

Startup all stations 216

Page 216: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

214

10

Automatic torch height control

Introduction Under automatic height control, the control automatically keeps the interval between the tool and the workpiece constant.

Task definition You wish to turn the automatic torch height control on and then off again.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

A process has been selected

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

Result The automatic torch height control has been turned on and then off again.

Step Action Control ele-ment

1 Press the section key P4 Process.The basic view of the selected process is displayed.

2 Press the F5 Automatic height control on key.The automatic torch height control is turned on

3 Press the F1 Lock automatic height control key.The automatic torch height control is turned offThe tool remains at the current height.

Page 217: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

215

10

Creep speed for height control

Introduction With the help of this function, the speed of the height control is reduced to creep speed.

Task definition You wish to reduce the speed of the height control to creep speed and then return to the original speed again.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

A process is selected.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The speed of the height control was reduced to creep speed and then the original speed was restored again.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the section key P4 Process.The basic view of the selected process is displayed.

2 Press the Extended function menu key.The extended function menu is displayed.

3 Press the F7 Creep speed for height control key.The function "Creep speed for height control" has been activated.

4 Press the F7 Creep speed for height control key again.The function 'Creep speed for height control' has been deactivated again.

Page 218: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

216

10

Startup all stations

Introduction With the function "Startup all stations," all stations can be started up simultaneously, includ-ing the tools.

Task definition You wish to start up all stations simultaneously.

Prerequisite The installation is complete.

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

Result All stations are started up, as long as the key is pressed. They are moved until a stop, at the maximum.

Step Action Control element

1 Press the Master up key in the station block on the op-erator panel of the control, and keep it pressed.

Page 219: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

217

10

10.2 Carriage clamping

Overview

Introduction The tools for processing the blank are located on movable carriages, which in turn are placed on the beam of the machine. With the help of the carriage clamping, how the move-ment of the carriages of a machine shall behave in relation to each other For that purpose you can assign clamping statuses to the carriages. These clamping statuses specify for ex-ample whether two carriages move in the same direction or in opposite directions.A differentiation is made between clamping motor carriages, i.e. carriages with their own drive, and clamping trailed carriages, i.e. carriages without their own drive.

Trailed carriages Trailed carriages are carriages that have no drive and regulating system of their own. They can be coupled to a motor carriage mechanically, usually by means of a steel belt. Depend-ing on the clamping status, they then move in the same direction or opposite to the con-nected motor carriage.

Motor carriage A motor carriage is a carriage that has its own drive and regulating system and is managed centrally by the control as a separate axis. There can be one or more motor carriages present on a machine, each of which in turn can move several trailed carriages.If a motor carriage is clamped, that is a logical clamping, that is, the motor carriage is not connected mechanically to another motor carriage and trailed by it. A clamped motor car-riage is moved by its own drive system according to the clamping status. Here the clamping status does not refer to another motor carriage, but to the part program.

continued on the next page

Note: Mechanical clamping applies in both manual mode and automatic mode, and refers exclusively to the corresponding motor carriage.

Note: Logical clamping applies only in automatic mode, since it refers exclusively to the part program.

Page 220: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

218

10

Overview, continued

Machine construction The basic view of the 'Carriage' section shows the schematic machine construction, includ-ing the carriage clamping, in graphic form.

Motor carriages are identified with the symbol .

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Clamping statuses 219

Manual clamping of a carriage 221

Page 221: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

219

10

Clamping statuses

Introduction Four different clamping statuses are available for the carriage.

Clamping status 'free'

Clamping status 'lock'

Clamping status 'like'

Clamping status 'mirror'

Clamping status 'free' With clamping status 'free' there is no mechanical connection either between the trailedcarriage and the motor carriage nor between the carriage and the beam of the machine. This clamping status is not available for motor carriages.

Clamping status 'lock' With clamping status 'lock,' the trailed carriage is clamped to the beam of the machine and cannot be moved. This clamping status is not available for motor carriages.

Clamping status 'like' With clamping status 'like,' the trailed carriage is connected to the motor carriage via the belt. Motor carriage and trailed carriage move in the same direction. If a motor carriage is clamped 'like,' the part program is executed in the programmed ori-entation.

Clamping status 'mir-ror'

With clamping status 'mirror,' the trailed carriage is connected to the motor carriage via the belt. If the motor carriage moves, the trailed carriage moves in the opposite direction. If a motor carriage is clamped 'mirrored,' the part program is executed in the mirror opposite orientation.

Machine construction In the schematic portrayal of the machine construction in the basic view of the 'Carriage' section, for each carriage its current clamping status is displayed as a symbol. The table indicates the meanings of the carriage clamping symbols:

continued on the next page

Symbol Significance

Clamping status 'like'

Clamping status 'mirror'

Clamping status 'lock'

Page 222: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

220

10

Clamping statuses, continued

Machine construction , continued

Symbol Significance

Clamping status 'free'

Page 223: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

221

10

Manual clamping of a carriage

Introduction This function allows manual clamping of every carriage. The carriage clamping can be ei-ther free, like, lock or mirror. In the graphic in the main view of the screen, the clamping status of the individual carriages is shown with the help of arrows.

Task definition You want to change the clamping of one or more carriages.

Prerequisite The installation has been performed successfully.

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

continued on the next page

Note: A change in the clamping is not possible when a part program is being executed.

Step Action Control ele-ment

1 Press the P5 key to call the carriage section.

2 Press the F1 Carriage clamping key. The main view of the carriage clamping is displayed.

3 Press and hold the F1 Carriage selection key and use the Left and Right cursor keys to select the carriage to be clamped. The symbol field of the F1 key is highlighted in co-lour and the selected carriage is marked in the graphic with a coloured frame.

4 Press one of the following keys to select the desired clamp-ing status:

F2 Clamping status 'free'

F3 Clamping status 'lock'

F4 Clamping status 'like'

F5 Clamping status 'mirror'

The symbol field of the key is highlighted in colour. The arrow symbols in the graphic change according to the clamping status.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the remaining carriages, if you wish to change the clamping status of a carriage.

Page 224: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

222

10

Manual clamping of a carriage, continued

Result The clamping status of one or more carriages has been changed. You can now leave the carriage section.

Page 225: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

223

10

10.3 Oxy fuel process

Overview

Introduction The machine manual gives you indications of when the oxy fuel process is suitable for your application.

Generally available functions

Functions that are available in all processes are described in the section Generally avail-able functions, p. 213:

Start up all stations

Automatic height control

Creep feed for manual height adjustment on/off

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Functions in the main view of the oxy fuel process 224

Page 226: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

224

10

Functions in the main view of the oxy fuel process

Introduction The main view of the oxy fuel process

Task definition You wish to call the functions in the main view of the oxy fuel process.

Prerequisite The 24-Volt power is turned on

The blank has been placed

Supplying of the station with the necessary operating resources is ensured

Procedure Perform the following steps in the given sequence:

Result The functions of the main view of the oxy fuel process have been called.

The functions in the function menu of the main view of the oxy fuel process are:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control element

1 Press the section key P4 Process. The basic view of the process section is displayed.

2 Press the F2 Oxy fuel process key.The main view of the oxy fuel process is displayed.

3 If you wish to call the functions of the extended function menu, press the Extended Function Menu key.The extended function menu of the main view of the oxy fuel process is displayed.

Key Symbol Function

F1 Lock automatic height adjustment

F2 Hole punching

F3 Edge cutting

F4 High pressure

F5 Automatic height adjustment on

Page 227: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

225

10

Functions in the main view of the oxy fuel process, continued

Result, continued

The functions on the extended function menu of the main view of the oxy fuel process are:

Key Symbol Function

F6 Heating off

F7 Heating on

F8 Cutting oxygen on

Key Symbol Function

F1 - not used

F2 - not used

F3 - not used

F4 - not used

F5 - not used

F6 - not used

F7 Height control at creep feed

F8 Preheat flame on at AF 8>

Page 228: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

226

10

10.4 Plasma process

Overview

Introduction The machine manual gives you indications of when the plasma process is suitable for your application.

Generally available functions

Functions that are available in all processes are described in the section Generally avail-able functions, p. 213:

Start up all stations

Automatic height control

Creep feed for manual height adjustment on/off

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Functions in the main view of the plasma process 227

Page 229: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

227

10

Functions in the main view of the plasma process

Introduction The main view of the plasma process

Task definition You wish to call the functions in the main view of the plasma process.

Prerequisite The 24-Volt power is turned on

The blank has been placed

Supplying of the station with the necessary operating resources is ensured

Procedure Perform the following working steps in the given sequence:

Result The functions of the main view of the plasma process have been called.

The functions in the function menu of the main view of the plasma process are:

continued on the next page

Step Action Control element

1 Press the section key P4 Process. The basic view of the process section is displayed.

2 Press the F1 Plasma process key.The main view of the plasma process is displayed.

3 If you wish to call the functions of the extended function menu, press the Extended Function Menu key.The extended function menu of the main view of the plas-ma process is displayed.

Key Symbol Function

F1 Lock automatic height adjustment

F2 Test mode

F3 Cutting break monitoring off

F4 Arc control on

F5 Automatic height adjustment on

Page 230: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Processes

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

228

10

Functions in the main view of the plasma process, continued

Result, continued

The functions on the extended function menu of the main view of the plasma process are:

Key Symbol Function

F6 Plasma off

F7 Plasma on

F8 Plasma release

Key Symbol Function

F1 IHS test

F2 - not used

F3 - not used

F4 - not used

F5 - not used

F6 - not used

F7 Height control at creep feed

F8 - not used

Page 231: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Appendices

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

229

AppendicesAppendices 89.01.005500000.400.388-GBOper atinginstr ucti ons -Prel iminary inf ormationVISI ON 55

Overview

Information in the ap-pendices

The appendices contain a summary of information that is not needed for standard opera-tion of the control, but needs to be looked up under certain circumstances

What’s in this Appen-dix?

The Appendix contains the following Chapters:

Chapter Chaptername Page

A Symbols of the function keys 231

B Status and error messages 285

Page 232: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Appendices

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

230

Page 233: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Function keys

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

231

AA

A Symbols of the function keysFunction keysA89.01.005500000.400. 388-GBOper atinginstructi ons -Preli minary informationVISION 55

Overview

Introduction This appendix lists the various symbols that are assigned to the function keys.

Optional functions Not all symbols in this list will appear on your controller. Some symbols stand for functions that are not available on every controller, since they are optional functions.

Order of the symbols The symbols are arranged on the basis of the sections in which they can appear. The sec-tions in turn are subdivided into the various views, which are defined by a view identifica-tion.

View identification You can look up the view identification of a particular window in the application menu "View and view identification."

Symbols listed more than once

It is not unusual that some symbols appear more than once in this appendix, since many functions are available in more than one view. In order to portray all possible symbols for each view, it is therefore necessary to list some symbols more than once.

General symbols In addition to the specific symbols for the individual views, there are general ones that can occur in any view.

Listing of the general symbols and symbol descriptions

continued on the next page

Symbol Description

Back (See Level back key, p. 27)The Back key which belongs to this symbol switches back one view or one function menu level. This may be continued until the basic view or the basic function menu is reached.

Extended function menu (See Extended menu key, p. 28)This symbol is only visible if more than eight functions are available on the function menu. By pressing the corresponding Extended function menukey you can switch to the extended function menu.

Page 234: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

232

A

Overview, continued

General symbols, continued

What’s in this Chapter? This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Symbol Description

Extended function menu - Back (See Extended menu key, p. 28)This symbol is only visible when the extended function menu is displayed. By pressing the corresponding Extended function menu key you can switch back to the original function menu.

Section Topic Page

A.1 Symbols in the data section 233

A.2 Symbols in the automatic section 242

A.3 Symbols in the manual mode section 253

A.4 Symbols in the options section 266

A.5 Symbols in the carriage section 271

A.6 Symbols in the process section 274

A.7 Symbols in the technology data section 280

A.8 Symbols in the startup section 282

Page 235: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

233

A

A.1 Symbols in the data section

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes the symbols that are assigned to the function keys in the individual views of the data section.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

File manager (view identification 1000) 234

Dateimanager - Festprogramm-Verzeichnis (Ansichtskennung 1001) 236

Dateimanager - Technologieverzeichnis (Ansichtskennung 1002) 237

Dateimanager - Jobverzeichnis (Ansichtskennung 1003) 238

Cutting program editor (view identification 1200) 239

Standard shape processing (view identification 1400) 241

Page 236: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

234

A

File manager (view identification 1000)

Introduction All icons which may occur in this view (with view identification 1000) are listed. This view shows the file manager.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Specific symbols on the extended function menu 1

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

continued on the next page

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Display selection (See Structure of the file manager, p. 148)Switching the focus between tree and list view The selected folder or the selected file is highlighted in blue.

F2 Edit program (See Execution of a file, p. 160)Calls an editor to edit the selected file. Depending on the data type, the appropriate editor for the file se-lected in the list view is activated. The available options are the part program editor, the job editor, the technology data display and the standard shape generator.

F3 Execute programCalling the program preparation and switching to the automatic mode section. Only executable programs are possible here (part programs or job files).

F4 - unassigned

F5 Reread (See Structure of the file manager, p. 148)The list view is updated. This is especially important with chang-ing media without automatic update, such as UDL.

F6 - unassigned

F7 - unassigned

F8 - unassigned

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Display selection (See Structure of the file manager, p. 148)Switches the focus between the tree and list views; the selected folder or selected file is displayed in inverse video.

F2 Rename (See Renaming a file, p. 151)Renaming of the selected file in the list view.

Page 237: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

235

A

File manager (view identification 1000), continued

Specific symbols on the extended function menu 1, continued

Specific symbols on the extended function menu 2

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F3 unassigned

F4 Paste (See Pasting a file, p. 159)In pasting, the files that were previously selected by copying or cutting are placed in the current directory.

F5 Copy (See Copying a file, p. 157)The selected files are designated for copying.

F6 Cut (See Cutting a file, p. 158)The selected files are designated for cutting.

F7 New file/folder (See Creating a new file or directory, p. 155)A new empty file or a new subdirectory is created in the current directory.

F8 Delete (See Deleting a file, p. 153)The selected files are deleted. This is preceded by a query dialog.

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Display selection (See Structure of the file manager, p. 148 )Switches the focus between the tree and list views; the selected folder or selected file is displayed in inverse video.

F2 UDL downloadFiles are downloaded from the host computer by means of UDL.

F3 UDL uploadFiles are uploaded to the host computer by means of UDL.

F4 - unassigned

F5 - unassigned

F6 - unassigned

F7 - unassigned

F8 - unassigned

Page 238: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

236

A

Dateimanager - Festprogramm-Verzeichnis (Ansichtskennung 1001)

Introduction All icons which may occur in this view (with view identification 1001) are listed. Bei dieser Ansicht handelt es sich um den Dateimanager mit ausgewähltem Festprogramm-Verzeich-nis.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Display selection (See Structure of the file manager, p. 148)Switching the focus between tree and list view Jeweils der aus-gewählte Ordner oder die ausgewählte Datei wird farbig hinterlegt dargestellt.

F2 Select standard shapeCalls the standard shape generator

F3 - not used

F4 - not used

F5 Reread (See Structure of the file manager, p. 148)The list view is updated. This is especially important with chang-ing media without automatic update, such as UDL.

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 239: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

237

A

Dateimanager - Technologieverzeichnis (Ansichtskennung 1002)

Introduction All icons which may occur in this view (with view identification 1002) are listed. Bei dieser Ansicht handelt es sich um den Dateimanager mit ausgewähltem Technologieverzeichnis.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Display selection (See Structure of the file manager, p. 148 )Switching the focus between tree and list view The selected folder or the selected file is highlighted in blue.

F2 Edit program (See Execution of a file, p. 160)Calls an editor to edit the selected file. Depending on the data type, the appropriate editor for the file se-lected in the list view is activated. The available options are the part program editor, the job editor, the technology data display and the standard shape generator.

F3 - unassigned

F4 - unassigned

F5 Reread (See Structure of the file manager, p. 148)The list view is updated. This is especially important with chang-ing media without automatic update, such as UDL.

F6 - unassigned

F7 - unassigned

F8 - unassigned

Page 240: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

238

A

Dateimanager - Jobverzeichnis (Ansichtskennung 1003)

Introduction All icons which may occur in this view (with view identification 1003) are listed. Bei dieser Ansicht handelt es sich um den Dateimanager mit ausgewähltem Job-Verzeichnis.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Display selection (See Structure of the file manager, p. 148)Switching the focus between tree and list view The selected folder or the selected file is highlighted in blue.

F2 Edit program (See Execution of a file, p. 160)Calls an editor to edit the selected file. Depending on the data type, the appropriate editor for the file se-lected in the list view is activated. The available options are the part program editor, the job editor, the technology data display and the standard shape generator.

F3 Execute programCalling the program preparation and switching to the automatic mode section. Only executable programs are possible here (part programs or job files).

F4 - not used

F5 Reread (See Structure of the file manager, p. 148)The list view is updated. This is especially important with chang-ing media without automatic update, such as UDL.

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 241: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

239

A

Cutting program editor (view identification 1200)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 1200). This view shows the cutting program editor.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

continued on the next page

Position Symbol Description

F1 Text/graphic (See Graphical display, p. 165)Switches the graphic display on and off in the part program editor.

F2 Find (See Finding characters in program code, p. 172)The functions "Find" and "Find next" in the cutting program editor can be used to search for characters and character strings in the program code of a cutting program.

F3 Replace (See Replacing of characters in the program code, p. 174)The function 'Replace' can be used to replace characters or char-acter strings in the program code of a cutting program with othercharacters or character strings.

F4 PasteWith the help of the "Paste" function you can paste program code into a cutting program.

Pasting cut characters and character strings (See Cutting and pasting program code , p. 177)

Pasting copied characters and character strings (See Copying and pasting program code , p. 176 )

F5 Copy (See Copying and pasting program code , p. 176)With the help of the "Copy" function you can select program code in a cutting program in order to paste it back in at a different place.

F6 Cut (See Cutting and pasting program code , p. 177)With the help of the 'Cut' function you can delete program code from a cutting program in order to paste it back in at a different place.

F7 Go to (See Line-by-line navigation in program code, p. 178)With the help of the "Go to" you can navigate to any desired line in the code of a cutting program.

F8 Delete program line (See Deleting lines in program code, p. 179)With the help of the function "Delete line" you can delete one or more lines in sequence from the code of a cutting program.

Page 242: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

240

A

Cutting program editor (view identification 1200), continued

Specific symbols on the extended function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Position Symbol Description

F1 - not used

F2 - not used

F3 - not used

F4 - not used

F5 Zoom (See Enlargement of segments in the graphical display of part programs, p. 180)With the help of the "Zoom" function, segments of the graphic de-piction of the cutting program can be designated for enlargement.

F6 Show zoom (See Enlargement of segments in the graphical dis-play of part programs, p. 180)With the help of the 'Show zoom' function, segments of the graphic depiction can be enlarged.

F7 CommentActivate display of help text

F8 ESSI displayActivate program text display

Page 243: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

241

A

Standard shape processing (view identification 1400)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 1400). This view is the basic view of the standard shape processing.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Acceptance of parametersRecalculation after parameter change

F2 Decrease parameter value

F3 Increase parameter value

F4 - not used

F5 - not used

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 244: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

242

A

A.2 Symbols in the automatic section

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes the symbols that are assigned to the function keys in the individual views of the automatic section.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Basic view of the automatic mode section (view identification 2000) 243

Switching of the coordinate displays (view identification 2100) 245

Moving a program (view identification 11000) 246

Switching of the coordinate displays (view identification 11100) 247

"Jogging the contour" (view identification 11300) 248

Positioning the machine with the handwheel (view identification 11360) 249

Options (view identification 201) 250

(View identification 11700) 251

Multi-Level-Return to Start (View identification 11800) 252

Page 245: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

243

A

Basic view of the automatic mode section (view identification 2000)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 2000). This view is the basic view of the automatic mode section.

Specific symbols in the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Specific symbols in the extended function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

continued on the next page

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Display selection (See Switching the program display, p. 197)Activates the various display options of the coordinate display

F2 Load part program (See Open part program in the automatic sec-tion, p. 207)A dialog box for selecting a part program is displayed.

F3 Parameters (See Enter parameters, p. 201)A dialog box for entering the program parameters is displayed.

F4 Options (See Select program options, p. 202)A dialog box for entering options is displayed (Mirroring, Laser pointer, Optional skip block).

F5 Load technology record (See Loading a technology record , p. 185)A dialog box for selecting a technology file is displayed.

F6 Set job setting(not yet implemented)

F7 Kerf check(not yet implemented)

F8 - not used

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Strap bridge (See Define strap bridge, p. 203)Calling the dialog for entering the strap bridge parameters

F2 Reference entryCalling the dialog for entering the reference texts for the remote sys-tem

F3 - not used

Page 246: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

244

A

Basic view of the automatic mode section (view identification 2000), continued

Specific symbols in the extended function menu, continued

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F4 - not used

F5 - not used

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 247: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

245

A

Switching of the coordinate displays (view identification 2100)

Introduction All icons which may occur in this view (with view identification 2100) are listed. This view shows switching of the coordinate displays.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbols Descriptions

F1 Machine coordinates (See Switching the program display, p. 197)Display of the machine coordinates

F2 Program coordinates (See Switching the program display, p. 197)Display of the program coordinates

F3 Speed (See Switching the program display, p. 197)Display of axis speeds

F4 Program (See Switching the program display, p. 197)Display of the program code

F5 Parameter display (See Switching the program display, p. 197)Display of the program parameters

F6 Program and process times (See Switching the program dis-play, p. 197)Display of the estimated program and process run times

F7 VBA coordinates

F8 - unassigned

Page 248: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

246

A

Moving a program (view identification 11000)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 11000). This view shows the view for moving a program in automatic mode.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Display selection (See Switching the program display, p. 197)Activates the various display possibilities

F2 Strap bridge (See Produce strap bridge , p. 208)Execute strap bridge or plate lock

F3 Moving when the program is interrupted (See Interrupting and continuing a running part program, p. 70)Jogging the contour

F4 - not used

F5 Forward/back (See Reverse processing direction, p. 210)Switching forward/backward

F6 Kerf on the flyThis function makes it possible to fine-tune the kerf settings during processing for more exact parts. The set value can be scaled be-tween 50% and 150% by means of a dialog box.

F7 Zoom

F8 Variable program navigationThis function makes it easier to move through a large program, cut omitted parts once more, or start over again at the beginning.

Page 249: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

247

A

Switching of the coordinate displays (view identification 11100)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 11100). This view shows the view 'Switching of the coordinate displays.'

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Machine coordinates (See Switching the program display, p. 197)Display of the machine coordinates

F2 Program coordinates (See Switching the program display, p. 197)Display of the program coordinates

F3 Speed (See Switching the program display, p. 197)Display of axis speeds

F4 Program (See Switching the program display, p. 197)Display of the program listing

F5 Parameters (See Switching the program display, p. 197)Display of the program preparation parameters

F6 Program time (See Switching the program display, p. 197)Display of the estimated program and process run times

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 250: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

248

A

"Jogging the contour" (view identification 11300)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 11300). This view is the view of jogging the contour during program execution.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Move to fix points (See Moving to the fix point , p. 120)Move to fix point

F2 Move to working area homes (See Move to the working area home , p. 121)Move to the working area home

F3 Move to target point (See Move to target point, p. 122)Move to position

F4 Move to program zero point (See Travel to the last program zero point, p. 124)Move to the zero point of the last program

F5 Move to machine home (See Move to the machine home point , p. 125)Move to machine zero point

F6 Handwheel move (See Manual mode with handwheel , p. 117)Positioning the machine with the handwheel

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 251: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

249

A

Positioning the machine with the handwheel (view identification 11360)

Introduction All icons which may occur in this view (with view identification 11360) are listed. This view is the view for positioning the machine with the handwheel.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Increase step size (See Manual mode with handwheel , p. 117)Handwheel step size larger

F2 Reduce step size (See Manual mode with handwheel , p. 117)Handwheel step size smaller

F3 - unassigned

F4 - unassigned

F5 - unassigned

F6 - unassigned

F7 - unassigned

F8 - unassigned

Page 252: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

250

A

Options (view identification 201)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 201). This view is the Options??? view .

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Acceptance of the option (See Select program options, p. 202)Confirmation and acceptance of the selection of the program op-tions.

F2 Option selection/deselection (See Select program options, p. 202)Set or remove marking for selection of a program option

F3 - not used

F4 - not used

F5 - not used

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 Cancellation (See Select program options, p. 202)Cancellation of the selection of the program options. The selection made is discarded.

Page 253: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

251

A

(View identification 11700)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 11700). This view is the view

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Show zoom

F2 Zoom size

F3 - not used

F4 - not used

F5 - not used

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 254: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

252

A

Multi-Level-Return to Start (View identification 11800)

Introduction All icons which may occur in this view (with view identification 11800) are listed. This view is the 'Multi-Level-Return to Start" view.

Specific symbols in the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 1st plunge-cutting pointMoving to the first plunge-cutting point of the program.

F2 1 step backMoving back one plunge-cutting hole.

F3 N steps backMoving back any desired number of plunge-cutting holes.

F4 N steps aheadMoving forward any desired number of plunge-cutting holes.

F5 1 step aheadMoving forward one plunge-cutting hole.

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 255: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

253

A

A.3 Symbols in the manual mode section

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes the symbols that are assigned to the function keys in the individual views of the manual mode section.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Basic view of the manual section (view identification 3000) 254

Coordinate display (view identification 3100) 255

Positioning motions in manual mode (view identification 3200) 256

Positioning the machine with the handwheel (view identification 3260) 257

Homing procedure (view identification 3400) 258

Blank preparation in manual mode (view identification 3500) 259

Manual blank alignment (view identification 3510) 260

Positioning with handwheel (view identification 3516) 261

Definition of the fix points (view identification 3520) 262

Trace/Teach Trace (view identification 3600) 263

Trace (view identification 3610) 264

Teach Trace (view identification 3620) 265

Page 256: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

254

A

Basic view of the manual section (view identification 3000)

Introduction All icons which may occur in this view (with view identification 3000) are listed. This view is the basic view of the manual section.

S\The specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Icon Description

F1 Display selection (See Switching the coordinate display, p. 114)Switching between machine coordinate display, program coor-dinate display and axis speed display.

F2 Positioning motions (See Positioning motion, p. 119)Calling function that enable movement of the tool to a firmly de-fined point

F3 - unassigned

F4 Homing procedure (See Move to reference points, p. 82)Homing the axes

F5 Blank preparation (See Blank preparation, p. 126)Adapting the controller to the current blank

F6 Teach trace (See Trace and teach trace, p. 129)Copying and digitizing of graphic models

F7 - unassigned

F8 - unassigned

Page 257: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

255

A

Coordinate display (view identification 3100)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 3100).This view is the coordinate display.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbols Descriptions

F1 Machine coordinates (See Switching the coordinate display, p. 114)Display of the machine coordinates

F2 Program coordinates (See Switching the coordinate display, p. 114)Display of the program coordinates

F3 Speed (See Switching the coordinate display, p. 114)Display of axis speeds

F4 - not used

F5 - not used

F6 - not used

F7 VBA coordinates

F8 - not used

Page 258: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

256

A

Positioning motions in manual mode (view identification 3200)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 3200). This view is the view 'Positioning motions.'

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Icon Description

F1 Move to fix points (See Moving to the fix point , p. 120)Move to fix point

F2 Move to working area homes (See Move to the working area home , p. 121)Move to the working area home. This function is also used to change the working area

F3 Move to target point (See Move to target point, p. 122)Move to a certain point within the working area currently in effect (absolute positioning) or movement by a certain amount (incre-mental positioning)

F4 Move to program zero point (See Travel to the last program zero point, p. 124)Move to the zero point of the last part program

F5 Move to machine home (See Move to the machine home point , p. 125)Move to the machine home.

F6 Handwheel move (See Manual mode with handwheel , p. 117)Positioning the tool with the handwheel

F7 VGA Fahrt auf 2 Positionen

F8 - unassigned

Page 259: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

257

A

Positioning the machine with the handwheel (view identification 3260)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with the view identification 3260). This view is the view of the handwheel movement.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the symbols and symbol descriptions

Position Icon Description

F1 Increase step size (See Manual mode with handwheel , p. 117)Enlarges the handwheel step size

F2 Reduce step size (See Manual mode with handwheel , p. 117)Reduces the handwheel step size

F3 - unassigned

F4 - unassigned

F5 - unassigned

F6 - unassigned

F7 - unassigned

F8 - unassigned

Page 260: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

258

A

Homing procedure (view identification 3400)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with the view identification 3400). This view is the view 'Homing procedure.'

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Acceptance of reference point (See Establish reference point without reference switches, p. 88)Accept reference point when the reference point is determined without reference switches.

F2 not used

F3 not used

F4 not used

F5 not used

F6 not used

F7 not used

F8 not used

Page 261: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

259

A

Blank preparation in manual mode (view identification 3500)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 3500). This view shows the blank preparation in manual mode.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Manual plate alignment (See Blank alignment, p. 89)A skewed position of the blank is compensated for by the control-ler when executing cutting programs.

F2 Define fix points (See Defining fix points, p. 127)The function 'Define fix point' offers the possibility of establishing up to 12 fix points. These points do not have to be within one working area, and can afterward be moved to automatically.

F3 Remnant platePickup of the blank (not yet implemented)

F4 - MPMMulti-plate management (not yet implemented)

F5 - Z axis teachZ axis teach (not yet implemented)

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 262: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

260

A

Manual blank alignment (view identification 3510)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 3510). This view shows the 'Manual blank alignment.'

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Accept current position (See Manual blank alignment with three points, p. 91)Acceptance of the current position of the motor carriage as the point for the manual blank alignment.

F2 2 point blank alignment (See Manual blank alignment with two points, p. 97)Two-point blank alignment

F3 Kamera

F4 - unassigned

F5 - unassigned

F6 Handwheel move (See Manual mode with handwheel , p. 117)As an alternative to the manual mode with the help of the joystick, the tool can also be moved with the help of the handwheel. With every motion of the handwheel, the tool is moved by a preset step size.

F7 - unassigned

F8 - unassigned

Page 263: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

261

A

Positioning with handwheel (view identification 3516)

Introduction All icons which may occur in this view (with view identification 3516) are listed. This view shows the positioning with the help of the handwheel.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Icon Description

F1 Increase step size (See Manual mode with handwheel , p. 117)The handwheel step size is increased

F2 Reduce step size (See Manual mode with handwheel , p. 117)The handwheel step size is reduced

F3 - unassigned

F4 - unassigned

F5 - unassigned

F6 - unassigned

F7 - unassigned

F8 - unassigned

Page 264: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

262

A

Definition of the fix points (view identification 3520)

Introduction All icons which may occur in this view (with view identification 3520) are listed. This view shows the view "Definition of the fix points".

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Acceptance of fix point (See Defining fix points, p. 127)The point moved to manually is accepted as a fix point.

F2 - unassigned

F3 - unassigned

F4 - unassigned

F5 - unassigned

F6 - unassigned

F7 - unassigned

F8 - unassigned

Page 265: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

263

A

Trace/Teach Trace (view identification 3600)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 3600). This view is the 'Trace/teach trace' view.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Trace (See Trace, p. 131)In trace mode, the line sequence of a graphic pattern is traced and at the same time is implemented by the machine when working on a workpiece.

F2 Teach trace (See Teach trace, p. 136)In teach trace mode, the line sequence of a graphic pattern is traced, and is converted to a cutting program and saved.

F3 - not used

F4 - not used

F5 - not used

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 266: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

264

A

Trace (view identification 3610)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 3610). This view is the view 'Trace.'

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Start trace procedure (See Tracing, p. 134)The trace procedure is activated, and can then be initiated by pressing the 'RUN' key.

F2 - not used

F3 - not used

F4 not used

F5 Turn left (See Tracing, p. 134)Specifies the direction the tracing head turns after finding the con-tour.

F6 Turn right (See Tracing, p. 134)Specifies the direction the tracing head turns after finding the con-tour.

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 267: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

265

A

Teach Trace (view identification 3620)

Introduction All icons which may occur in this view (with view identification 3620) are listed. This view is the 'Teach trace' view.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Start teach trace procedureThe trace procedure is activated, and can then be initiated by pressing the 'RUN' key.

F2 - unassigned

F3 - unassigned

F4 - unassigned

F5 Turn leftSpecifies the direction the tracing head turns after finding the con-tour.

F6 Turn rightSpecifies the direction the tracing head turns after finding the con-tour.

F7 Teach trace reference pointSets the teach trace reference point. The reference point is neces-sary is you wish to pick up more than one closed contour. This ref-erence point is accepted into the cutting program as the program zero point.

F8 - unassigned

Page 268: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

266

A

A.4 Symbols in the options section

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes the symbols that are assigned to the function keys in the individual views of the options section.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Option entry (view identification 4000) 267

Machine-related options (view identification 4100) 268

Controller-related options (view identification 4200) 269

DDE-related options (view identification 4300) 270

Page 269: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

267

A

Option entry (view identification 4000)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 4000). This view is the view 'Options entry.'

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Adjust machineSwitch to the image with machine options

F2 System settingsSwitch to the image with controller options

F3 DDESwitch to the image with DDE functions

F4 - not used

F5 - not used

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 270: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

268

A

Machine-related options (view identification 4100)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 4100). This view is the view of the machine-related options.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1

F2

F3

F4 OptionsMachine-related options: Selection or deselection of special ma-chine options

F5

F6

F7

F8

Page 271: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

269

A

Controller-related options (view identification 4200)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 4200). This view is the view 'Controller-related options.'

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 ColoursChanging colours

F2 Changing languageLanguage selection

F3 Determining the operatorOperator selection

F4 OptionsSelection or deselection of special controller options

F5

F6

F7

F8

Page 272: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

270

A

DDE-related options (view identification 4300)

Introduction All icons which may occur in this view (with view identification 1000) are listed. This view is the view of the DDE-related options.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 MaschinendatenAktivierung der Ansicht zur Erfassung ausgewählter Maschinen-daten.

F2 Process counterAktivierung der Ansicht der Prozesszähler.

F3 - not used

F4 - not used

F5 Daten zurücksetzenZurücksetzen des aktuell ausgewählten Maschinendaten.

F6 Grenzwert setzenNeuen Grenzwert für den aktuell ausgewählten Zähler oder Zeit-messer setzen. (In service mode only)

F7 Operator log-inDDE functions: Pressing the key sends the requirement box for the operator log-in dialog box to the remote system.

F8 Remote releaseDDE functions: Pressing the key releases the control for operation by the remote system .

Page 273: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

271

A

A.5 Symbols in the carriage section

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes the symbols that are assigned to the function keys in the individual views of the carriage section.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Basic view of carriage (view identification 5000) 272

Carriage clamping (view identification 5100) 273

Page 274: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

272

A

Basic view of carriage (view identification 5000)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with the view identification 5000). This view is the basic view of the carriage.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Carriage clamping (See Manual clamping of a carriage, p. 221)Switches to selection of the carriage clamping

F2 - not used

F3 - not used

F4 - not used

F5 - not used

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 275: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

273

A

Carriage clamping (view identification 5100)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 5100). This view is the view of the carriage clamping.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Carriage selection (See Manual clamping of a carriage, p. 221)Selection of the carriage to be clamped with a pressed key.

F2 Clamping status 'free' (See Clamping status 'free', p. 219)Clamp carriage free

F3 Clamping status 'lock' (See Clamping status 'lock' , p. 219)Clamp carriage to the extension (beam)

F4 Clamping status 'like' (See Clamping status 'like', p. 219)Clamp carriage congruent

F5 Clamping status 'mirror' (See Clamping status 'mirror' , p. 219)Clamp carriage in mirror image

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 276: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

274

A

A.6 Symbols in the process section

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes the symbols that are assigned to the function keys in the individual views of the process section.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Basic view of the process section (view identification 30000) 275

Basic view of the plasma process (view identification 30001) 276

Basic view of the oxy fuel process (view identification 30002) 278

Page 277: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

275

A

Basic view of the process section (view identification 30000)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with the view identification 30000). This view is the basic view of the process section.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the symbols and symbol descriptions

Note: The availability of the processes in this view depends on how the machine is equipped.

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Plasma process (See Plasma process, p. 226)Press the key to select the plasma process and change to the ba-sic view of the plasma process.

F2 Oxy fuel process (See Oxy fuel process, p. 223)Press the key to select the oxy fuel process and change to the ba-sic view of the oxy fuel process.

F3 Plasma markingPress the key to select the plasma marking process and change to the basic view of the plasma marking process.

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

Page 278: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

276

A

Basic view of the plasma process (view identification 30001)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 30001). This view is the basic view of the plasma process.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Specific symbols on the extended function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

continued on the next page

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Lock automatic height adjustment (See Automatic torch height control, p. 214)The automatic torch height control is turned off The tool remains at the current height.

F2 Test mode (See Functions in the main view of the plasma pro-cess, p. 227)

F3 Cutting break monitoring off (See Functions in the main view of the plasma process, p. 227)

F4 Arc regulation on (See Functions in the main view of the plasma process, p. 227)

F5 Automatic height adjustment on (See Automatic torch height control, p. 214)The automatic torch height control is turned onUnder automatic height control, the controller automatically keeps the interval be-tween the tool and the workpiece constant.

F6 Plasma off (See Functions in the main view of the plasma pro-cess, p. 227)

F7 Plasma on (See Functions in the main view of the plasma pro-cess, p. 227)

F8 Plasma release (See Functions in the main view of the plasma process, p. 227)

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 IHS test (See Functions in the main view of the plasma process, p. 227)

Page 279: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

277

A

Basic view of the plasma process (view identification 30001), continued

Specific symbols on the extended function menu , continued

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F2 Height control at creep feed (See Automatic torch height con-trol, p. 214)With the help of this function, the speed of the height control is re-duced to creep speed.

F3 - not used

F4 - not used

F5 - not used

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 280: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

278

A

Basic view of the oxy fuel process (view identification 30002)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in this view (with view identification 30002). This view is the basic view of the oxy fuel process.

Specific symbols on the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

continued on the next page

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Lock automatic height adjustment (See Automatic torch height control, p. 214)The automatic torch height control is turned off The tool remains at the current height.

F2 Hole punching (See Functions in the main view of the oxy fuel process, p. 224)

F3 Edge cutting (See Functions in the main view of the oxy fuel pro-cess, p. 224)

F4 High pressure (See Functions in the main view of the oxy fuel process, p. 224)

F5 Automatic height adjustment on (See Automatic torch height control, p. 214)The automatic torch height control is turned onUnder automatic height control, the controller automatically keeps the interval between the tool and the workpiece constant.

F6 Heating off (See Functions in the main view of the oxy fuel pro-cess, p. 224)

F7 Heating on (See Functions in the main view of the oxy fuel pro-cess, p. 224)

F8 Cutting oxygen on (See Functions in the main view of the oxy fuel process, p. 224)

Page 281: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

279

A

Basic view of the oxy fuel process (view identification 30002), continued

Specific symbols on the extended function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Height control at creep feed (See Creep speed for height con-trol, p. 215)With the help of this function, the speed of the height control is re-duced to creep speed.

F2 Preheat flame on at AF 8 (See Functions in the main view of the oxy fuel process, p. 224)

F3 - not used

F4 - not used

F5 - not used

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 - not used

Page 282: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

280

A

A.7 Symbols in the technology data section

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes the symbols that are assigned to the function keys in the individual views of the technology data section.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Parameter view of the technology data (view identification 9000) 281

Page 283: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

281

A

Parameter view of the technology data (view identification 9000)

Introduction All of the symbols are listed that can occur in view with Window ID 9000. This view shows the parameter view of the technology data.

Symbols Listing of the symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 - not used

F2 Change value (See Changing a technology parameter, p. 186)The technology parameters of the active technology record can be changed within the given limits.

F3 - not used

F4 - not used

F5 Load technology record (See Loading a technology record , p. 185)With the help of this function you can load a TDF file and the technology record which it contains.

F6 Display image (See Display image file, p. 184)An image file can be displayed for each technology record. The function can only be activated if the corresponding technologyrecord contains a reference to an image.

F7 Store (See Save changed technology record, p. 188)With the help of this function you can store a modified technolo-gy record.

F8 - not used

Page 284: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

282

A

A.8 Symbols in the startup section

Overview

Introduction This chapter describes the symbols that are assigned to the function keys in the individual views of the startup section.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Note: Most of the functions in the section "Startup" are only active when the service mode is turned on. These functions are described in the service help or the Service Manual.

Topic Page

Basic view of the startup section (View identification 6000) 283

Constant editor (View identification 6100) 284

Page 285: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

283

A

Basic view of the startup section (View identification 6000)

Introduction All icons which may occur in this view (with view identification 6000) are listed. This view is the basic view of the startup section.

Specific symbols in the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Constant editorOpens the constant editor. Without the service mode the con-stants can only be displayed but not edited.

F2 This function is only active in service mode and is described in the Service help and/or the Service manual.

F3 This function is only active in service mode and is described in the Service help and/or the Service manual.

F4 This function is only active in service mode and is described in the Service help and/or the Service manual.

F5 This function is only active in service mode and is described in the Service help and/or the Service manual.

F6 This function is only active in service mode and is described in the Service help and/or the Service manual.

F7 This function is only active in service mode and is described in the Service help and/or the Service manual.

F8 - not used

Page 286: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Function keys

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

284

A

Constant editor (View identification 6100)

Introduction All icons which may occur in this view (with view identification 6100) are listed. This view shows the constant editor.

Specific symbols in the function menu

Listing of the specific symbols and symbol descriptions

Posi-tion

Symbol Description

F1 Display selectionSwitching the focus between tree and list view The selected folder or the selected file is highlighted in blue.

F2 This function is only active in service mode and is described in the Service help and/or the Service manual.

F3 Find...Finding a constant with the help of the constant number.

F4 This function is only active in service mode and is described in the Service help and/or the Service manual.

F5 - not used

F6 - not used

F7 - not used

F8 This function is only active in service mode and is described in the Service help and/or the Service manual.

Page 287: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Messages

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

285

BB

B Status and error messagesMessagesB89.01. 005500000.400. 388-GBOperatinginstructions -Preliminary informationVI SION 55

Overview

Introduction The control communicates with the operator by means of dialog boxes. A special function is attached to the status and error messages, which are displayed in the status and error dialog. For this, it is unimportant which view and which section are currently displayed. The message superposes the current view.Status and error messages on the control are indicated in the form of the number and des-ignation of the error. In this chapter, the messages are separated into error and status mes-sages and are listed and displayed in numerical order.

Organization of the message

The status or error message consists of the four columns "Type," "ID," "Description" and "Time." In the column "Type", either the symbol "MC", "OC" or "PLC" is displayed, depend-ing on whether the message is related to the operation control (OC), the machine control (MC) or the PLC (PLC). The column "ID" includes a number allocated to the current mes-sage. In the "Description" column the status or error message is briefly described. The col-umn "Time" indicates the point of time when the message occurred. The current function menu above the function keys of the initial view is superposed. The function keys F1 "OK" and F8 "Cancel" are available. If you press the key F1 "OK", the message is acknowledged and will be deleted. If you press the key F8 "Cancel", the message is not displayed any longer, but it will not be deleted. Using the application menu 'Status & error dialog' will re-display the message.

What’s in this Chapter? This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section Topic Page

B.1 Status messages 287

B.2 Error messages 293

Page 288: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

286

B

Page 289: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

287

B

B.1 Status messages

Overview

Introduction Status messages show that something has changed in the current situation of the control, e. g. the service mode has been switched on. In case of a status message, the symbol in the column 'Type' is blue.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Status messages 2001 - 2009 288

Status messages 2010 - 2019 290

Page 290: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

288

B

Status messages 2001 - 2009

Introduction All status messages with numbers from 2001 to 2009 are listed. The cause of the status message and the corresponding action are indicated, if any is necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error status message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by angle brackets.Example: '<Variable comment>'In this case <Variable comment> stands for a comment that is created by the control de-pending on the situation.

Status message 2001 Start initialization of the application

Status message 2002 End initialization of the application

Status message 2004 Start initialization of the MC

Status message 2005 End initialization of the MC

Status message 2006 <Variable comment>

continued on the next page

Cause Action

The OC application begins with the initial-ization of the internal data structures.

-

Cause Action

The OC application has ended the initial-ization.

-

Cause Action

The MC application begins with the initial-ization of the internal data structures.

-

Cause Action

The MC application has ended the initial-ization.

-

Cause Action

Free comment lineExample: Comments issued with part pro-grams.

If an action is necessary, it is stated in the message.

Page 291: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

289

B

Status messages 2001 - 2009, continued

Status message 2007 Function currently still being revised!

Status message 2008 The machine control has not been started yet!

Status message 2009 The machine is no longer referenced.

Cause Action

These are functions that have already been selected but are not yet fully imple-mented or released.

-

Cause Action

A function was activated via the control panel which requires the machine control (MC).

Wait until the MC is fully ready for use.

Cause Action

The reference status has changed. That occurs when axis initialization is selected, or in the event of a frequency or portal er-ror.

End the running function and correct the errors.

Then perform a homing procedure.

Page 292: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

290

B

Status messages 2010 - 2019

Introduction All status messages with numbers from 2010 to 2019 are listed. The cause of the status message and the corresponding action are indicated, if any is necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error status message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by angle brackets.Example: '<Variable comment>'In this case <Variable comment> stands for a comment that is created by the control de-pending on the situation.

Status message 2010 Beginning of the initialization of AncDoc

Status message 2011 End of the initialization of AncDoc

Status message 2012 Beginning of initialization of the constants

Status message 2013 End of initialization of the constants

continued on the next page

Cause Action

The OC application begins with the initial-ization of the internal data structures.

-

Cause Action

The OC application ended the initialization of the internal data structures.

-

Cause Action

The OC application begins calculating the internal setting parameters based on the constant values.

-

Cause Action

The OC application ended the calculation of the internal setting parameters.

-

Page 293: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

291

B

Status messages 2010 - 2019, continued

Status message 2014 The connection was made between operation control (OC) and machine control (MC).

Status message 2015 Operation control (OC) is ready for operation.

Status message 2016 Machine control (MC) is ready for operation

Status message 2017 Displacement motion halted. Please press the 'RUN' key!

Status message 2018 Trace output logging active!

continued on the next page

Cause Action

The OC application made the connection with the MC:

Parameterized error texts were sent successfully to the MC.

The MC read the derived constants and set its data structures accordingly.

Handshakes are exchanged cyclically.

-

Cause Action

This message is not used at present. -

Cause Action

MC is fully initialized and exchanging handshakes with OC

Acknowledge the notification.

Cause Action

The displacement motion was interrupted. The machine must return to the starting position.

Press the 'RUN' key to move to the starting position of the offset.

Cause Action

Logging of the internal DebugOut mes-sages into a file is active. That can signifi-cantly slow down the program flow of the OC, and possibly of the MC!

-

Page 294: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

292

B

Status messages 2010 - 2019, continued

Status message 2019 Command not executed because the machine is still running. Press the STOP key!

Cause Action

Machine still running. Press the STOP key!

Page 295: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

293

B

B.2 Error messages

Overview

Introduction Error messages indicate that the control is not working properly, e. g. a part program can-not be opened. In case of an error message, the symbol in the column "Type" is red.

What’s in this Section? This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Error messages 3001 - 3008 294

Error messages 3009 - 3029 296

Error messages 3031 - 3048 298

Error messages 3049 - 3058 300

Error messages 3059 - 3092 302

Error messages 3093 - 3102 307

Error messages 3103 - 3113 309

Error messages 3114 - 3128 312

Error messages 3129 - 3200 315

Error messages 3201 - 3304 318

Error messages 3305 - 3390 321

Error messages 3391 - 3404 324

Error messages 3405 - 3418 327

Error messages 3419 - 3510 330

Error messages 3511 - 3570 333

Error messages 3571 - 3604 336

Error messages 3605 - 3707 339

Error messages 3708 - 3721 342

Page 296: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

294

B

Error messages 3001 - 3008

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3001 to 3008 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the corresponding action, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by angle brackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3001 Error when initializing the OLE libraries

Error 3002 Error when instancing ACS::ICommon

Error 3003 Error when instancing ACS::IVariable

Error 3005 Error when opening the log file

Error 3006 Material thickness in line<n> not permitted

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

A logging file in the logging directory can-not be opened or created.

Check whether the data medium is full or write protected.

Cause of the error Action

Erroneous programming in the part pro-gram.

Correct the part program.

Page 297: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

295

B

Error messages 3001 - 3008, continued

Error 3007 Technology record file in line <n> cannot be loaded

Error 3008 Circle error (zero radius) in program line <n>

Cause of the error Action

The file used in the part program for tech-nology data is defective or is not present on the control.

Install the file with the needed technology data on the control.

Cause of the error Action

Erroneous programming in the part pro-gram.

Correct the part program.

Page 298: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

296

B

Error messages 3009 - 3029

Introduction All of the error messages used with the numbers from 3009 to 3029 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the corresponding action, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by angle brackets.Example:'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3009 Circle error (unequal radii) in program line <n>

Error 3010 Format error in program line <n>

Error 3020 'Error when opening the program <n>.'

Error 3021 Error when reading program <n>

Error 3024 Block <n>/offset <m> not found in file <o>!

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

Erroneous programming in the part pro-gram.

Correct the part program.

Cause of the error Action

Erroneous programming in the part pro-gram.

Correct the part program.

Cause of the error Action

The part program is not present, or is de-fective or has erroneous syntax.

Provide the needed part program, or correct it if necessary.

Cause of the error Action

Error when reading the indicated line of the part program.

Correct the part program.

Cause of the error Action

The line being searched for is not present in the part program.

Correct the part program.

Page 299: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

297

B

Error messages 3009 - 3029, continued

Error 3025 Label <n> not found in file <m!

Error 3028 No VDL file found: <n>!

Error 3029 Error when initializing the technology data

Cause of the error Action

The text being searched for is not present in the part program.

Correct the part program.

Cause of the error Action

The VDL file is not present on the control or is defective.

Install the VDL file on the control.

Cause of the error Action

One or more files of the technology data are not present on the control, or are de-fective or have syntax errors.

Install the correct files for the technology data on the control.

Page 300: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

298

B

Error messages 3031 - 3048

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3031 to 3048 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the corresponding action, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by angle brackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3031 Error when reading the technology record file <n>!

Error 3035 Error when loading (activating) the technology record for process <n>

Error 3039 Error in the CAN bus protocol: Input event not open!

Error 3040 Error in the CAN bus protocol: Bus server not started

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

The file with the technology data is not present on the control, or is defective or has erroneous syntax.

Install the correct technology record file on the control.

Cause of the error Action

No technology data exist on the control for the indicated process.

Install the technology data for the indicated process on the control.

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

The connection to the CANDLL cannot be established.

Check whether the ASIOB2 server was in-stalled and started properly.

Check the setting of jumper 1 on the pro-cess card GK5.

Page 301: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

299

B

Error messages 3031 - 3048, continued

Error 3041 Error in the CAN bus protocol: Internal error [ <n>]

Error 3043 Error in the OC-MC synchronization: OC log-in failed

Error 3044 Error in the OC-MC synchronization: OC time monitoring

Error 3046 Error during file access, error number: <n>

Error 3047 Error when instancing ACS::IMsgCmd!

Error 3048 To many ACS::IMsgCmd connection present!

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

The OC application received no communi-cation from the MC for more than 10 sec-onds.

None.The connection will be re-established auto-matically.Notify Service if the problem persists or oc-curs often.

Cause of the error Action

An error occurred while processing a file Check the write protection and access rights.

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Page 302: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

300

B

Error messages 3049 - 3058

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3049 to 3058 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the corresponding action, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by angle brackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3049 Undefined error when logging on ACS::IMsgCmd!

Error 3050 Error in the OC-MC synchronization: OC and MC log-in failed

Error 3051 No more communication from control panel; machine stopped

Error 3052 CFG file not found! No system options available!

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

The constant connection between the MC and the control panel is interrupted.

Check the connection.

Check the control panel.

Cause of the error Action

The configuration file CFG is defective or is not present on the control.

Install theconfiguration file that belongs to the machine on the control.

Page 303: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

301

B

Error messages 3049 - 3058, continued

Error 3053 CFG file path not found! No system options available!

Error 3054 CFG file access denied! No system options available!

Error 3055 LIC file not found! No system options available!

Error 3056 LIC file path not found! No system options available!

Error 3057 Access to LIC file denied! No system options available!

Error 3058 CFG-LIC checksums not the same! No system options available!

Cause of the error Action

The path of the configuration file CFG is not present on the control.

Install the configuration file that belongs to the machine on the control.

Cause of the error Action

Unable to access the configuration file CFG.

Check your operator rights.

Install the configuration file that belongs to the machine on the control.

Cause of the error Action

The configuration file LIC is defective or is not present on the control.

Install the configuration file that belongs to the machine on the control.

Cause of the error Action

The path of the configuration file LIC is not present on the control.

Install the configuration file that belongs to the machine on the control.

Cause of the error Action

Unable to access the configuration file LIC.

Check your operator rights. .

Install the configuration file that belongs to the machine on the control.

Cause of the error Action

The configuration files are defective Notify Service.

Page 304: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

302

B

Error messages 3059 - 3092

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3059 to 3092 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the corresponding action, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by angle brackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3059 SysCfg.DLL internal error: No system options available!

Error 3060 Initialization of the constants, MC not responding!

Error 3061 Initialization of the constants; axes not stopping!

Error 3062 Function checksum is erroneous! No system options available!

Error 3063 Error when reading the character generator file: <n> : <m>

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

The axes were not stopped during a deri-vation of constants.

Start the constant derivation again.

Cause of the error Action

The file with the fonts for the character generator is defective or is not present on the control.

Install the font file for the character generator.

Page 305: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

303

B

Error messages 3059 - 3092, continued

Error 3064 Network error; error text: <n>

Error 3065 Please enter a number between <n> and <m>!

Error 3066 Serious internal error!

Error 3067 Error when accessing file <n>! Error no.: <m>

Error 3068 Error when generating the file image! Path: <n> Error no.: <m>

Error 3069 File cannot be opened! Path: <n> Error no.: <m>

Error 3070 Serious internal error!

Error 3071 No number of '\\' present in INF file!

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Page 306: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

304

B

Error messages 3059 - 3092, continued

Error 3072 Number indication in the INF file is incorrect!

Error 3073 No '\\' at the end of the character string in the INF file!

Error 3074 Description of the number range in the INF file is incorrect!

Error 3075 Fewer text entries than numerical entries in the INF file!

Error 3076 Fewer numerical entries than text entries in the INF file!

Error 3077 For constant type 4, a set of data is missing in the INF file!

Error 3078 Error when accessing file <n>! Cause of the error: <m>

Error 3079 Error when allocating memory for map file!

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Page 307: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

305

B

Error messages 3059 - 3092, continued

Error 3080 No valid operator UMV file!

Error 3081 Too many directory entries!

Error 3082 Too many value entries in the directory!

Error 3083 Entry already exists!

Error 3084 Error when inserting the new entry!

Error 3085 Error when renaming the entry!

Error 3086 Please enter directory name!

Error 3087 Data cannot be saved!

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Page 308: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

306

B

Error messages 3059 - 3092, continued

Error 3088 No valid ATAS AMV file!

Error 3089 Error when deriving <n>

Error 3090 Constant no.: <n>

Error 3091 Reason: <n>

Error 3092 Format error in the CFG/LIC archive! No system options available!

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Page 309: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

307

B

Error messages 3093 - 3102

Introduction All of the error messages used with the numbers from 3093 to 3102 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the correspondingaction, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by anglebrackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3093 The inactive key symbol <n> could not be produced

Error 3094 Wrong control panel version! Control panel type = <n>, firmware version = <m>

Error 3095 Invalid selection of the tool offsets

Error 3096 Non-valid station number

Error 3097 Non-valid carriage number

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

At attempt was made to produce the key symbol in the form of gray shading. That resulted in an error.

Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

The control panel reports an invalid con-trol panel version.

Check the control panel version and notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

A non-valid offset type is listed in the con-stants.

Correct the value for the offset type in the constants.

Cause of the error Action

A non-valid station number for a tool is list-ed in the constants.

Correct the values of the station number for the tool in the constants.

Cause of the error Action

A non-valid carriage number for a tool is listed in the constants.

Correct the values of the carriage number for the tool in the constants.

Page 310: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

308

B

Error messages 3093 - 3102, continued

Error 3098 Non-valid process number

Error 3099 Missing station constant file

Error 3100 Non-valid carriage type

Error 3101 Non-valid axis allocation

Error 3102 Non-valid sensory analysis method for the automatic reference

Cause of the error Action

A non-valid process number for a tool is listed in the constants.

Correct the values of the process number for the tool in the constants.

Cause of the error Action

The matching station constant file for a station is missing.

Install the station constant file on the control.

Cause of the error Action

A non-valid carriage type is listed in the constants.

Correct the values for the carriage type in the constants.

Cause of the error Action

A non-valid axis is allocated to a motor carriage in the constants.

In The same axis is allocated to more than one motor carriage in the con-stants.

A belt-clamped carriage is allocated to a non-valid axis in the constants.

Correct the values in the constants.

Cause of the error Action

A non-valid sensory analysis method for the automatic reference is listed in the constants.

Correct the values for the sensory analysis method in the constants.

Page 311: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

309

B

Error messages 3103 - 3113

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3103 to 3113 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the correspondingaction, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by anglebrackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3103 Axis position outside of the axis limit switch

Error 3104 The AHT configuration file was not found: <n>

Error 3105 Connection to the AHT<n> interrupted

Error 3106 Error when reading the macro file <n>

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

An axis position outside of the axis limit switch is entered in the constants.

Correct the values for the axis position in the constants.

Cause of the error Action

The 'Hand-held terminal' function is acti-vated, but the configuration file is missing or defective.

Reinstall the configuration file on the control.

Cause of the error Action

The control receives no feedback from the hand-held terminal.

Check the functioning of the hand-held ter-minal.

Check the power supply of the hand-held terminal.

Check the cable connection.

Check the settings of the ASIOB server in the control.

Cause of the error Action

The named macro file is not present on the control or is defective.

Install the macro file on the control.

Page 312: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

310

B

Error messages 3103 - 3113, continued

Error 3107 This AHT function is not implemented!

Error 3108 Functionality <n> is not available in this configuration.

Error 3109 Wrong PLC configuration. No PLC can be started.

Error 3110 Non-valid path for the CE file system. Drive letters and special characters are not al-lowed

Error 3111 It is not possible to initialize the constants when the machine is running. Do you want to discard the changes?

Error 3112 No Timers & Counters definition file found <n>

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

the hand-held terminal is attempting to ini-tiate a function that is not intended for the hand-held terminal.

Add the function to the AHT configuration file, if that is possible.

Cause of the error Action

A hand-held terminal was connected, al-though this function is not available.

Notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

The 'Timers&Counters' function is activat-ed, but the configuration file is missing or defective.

Reinstall the configuration file on the control.

Page 313: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

311

B

Error messages 3103 - 3113, continued

Error 3113 <n>

Cause of the error Action

A counter of the 'Timers&Counters' func-tion exceeded its limit.

Follow the advice in the message.

Page 314: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

312

B

Error messages 3114 - 3128

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3114 to 3128 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the corresponding action, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by angle brackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3114 Not all Timers & Counters have been initialized since only the basic functionality is avail-able.

Error 3117 Language-dependent error text file not found <n>

Error 3118 Non-valid Timers & Counters type (no. <n>)

Error 3119 Timers & Counters (no. <n>): Non-valid flag designation (maximum length 64 char-acters)

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

Only the basic functionalty of the function is available.

-.

Cause of the error Action

The language-dependent error text file for the function 'Timers&Counters' was not found.

Copy the language-dependent tre file of the function 'Timers&Counters' to the control.

Cause of the error Action

Faulty configuration of the function 'Tim-ers&Counters.'

Correct the Timers&Counters configuration file.

Cause of the error Action

Non-valid designation of a signal in the function 'Timers&Counters.'

Correct the Timers&Counters configuration file.

Page 315: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

313

B

Error messages 3114 - 3128, continued

Error 3120 Timers & Counters (No. <n>, <m>): Non-valid initial value!

Error 3121 Timers & Counters (No. <n>, <m>): Non-valid action!

Error 3122 Function aborted after error in instruction <n>, function <m>

Error 3123 Error during program interpretation!

Error 3124 Cancellation in memory management!

Error 3125 Cancellation in line analysis!

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

A non-valid initial value was specified for the function 'Timers&Counters.'

Correct the Timers&Counters configuration file.

Cause of the error Action

There is a faulty configuration for the func-tion 'Timers&Counters.'

Correct the Timers&Counters configuration file.

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Page 316: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

314

B

Error messages 3114 - 3128, continued

Error 3126 Cancellation in format adaptation!

Error 3127 Cancellation in kerf calculation!

Error 3128 Cancellation when writing the data buffer!

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Page 317: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

315

B

Error messages 3129 - 3200

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3129 to 3200 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the correspondingaction, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by anglebrackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3129 Key of the control panel in jammed

Error 3130 Error when generating the screen shot! Too little time between the screens hots!

Error 3131 The text could not be replaced because the permissible line length was exceeded.

Error 3132 Error during initilization of the programm interpretation!

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

After power-on the control panel reports a sticking key; that is, the control recognizes more than one keypress at the same time.

Check the keys for mechanical damage.

Shut off power to the control panel once.

If necessary, replace the control panel.

Cause of the error Action

There was too little time between the gen-eration of two screen shots, so that the second screen shot could not be generat-ed.

Generate the screen shot again.

Cause of the error Action

The permissible link length was exceeded when replacing the text.

Check the replaced text.

Cause of the error Action

A serious system error has occurred. Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Page 318: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

316

B

Error messages 3129 - 3200, continued

Error 3133 Too much text for marking device!

Error 3134 Geometry too short for marking device!

Error 3135 Multiple use of the number of the relative tool offset

Error 3136 Collision between relative and absolute tool offset

Error 3137 Non-valid selection of the relative tool offset

Error 3138 Error when initializing the format converter!

Error 3139 Serious PLC error (timeout)!

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

The text for the marking device in the part program contains too many characters.

Shorten the text for the marking device, or mark it with a different font.

Cause of the error Action

The path for the text of the marking device in the part program is too short.

Shorten the text for the marking device, mark it with a different font or lengthen the marking path.

Cause of the error Action

An offset number was defined more than once in the constants.

Make certain that each type of offset is used only once.

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

An undefined offset was selected in the offsets.

Select the desired offset type and enter it into the constants.

Cause of the error Action

Error when initializing the format converter Notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

A PLC cycle takes longer than 16ms. Notify Service.

Page 319: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

317

B

Error messages 3129 - 3200, continued

Error 3140 No signals from the additional panel <n>

Error 3200 No valid FTP server address

Cause of the error Action

A control panel did not send any signals for a prolonged period.

Carry out a panel test.

Check the cable connection.

Notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

Page 320: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

318

B

Error messages 3201 - 3304

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3201 to 3304 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the corresponding action, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by angle brackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3201 File already exists. Overwrite?

Error 3202 The path specification is invalid. (Invalid character or backslash at end.) Please cor-rect. Path: <n>

Error 3203 An error occurred while creating the local UDL directory. Error number <n> error text <m> path: <o>

Error 3204 No UDL device has been entered in the device constant. The data source is set inac-tive.

Error 3205 An error occurred while creating the local directory. Error number <n> error text <m> path: <o>

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Page 321: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

319

B

Error messages 3201 - 3304, continued

Error 3206 An error occurred while automatically creating the directory tree. The number of subdirectories is to large. Maximum number permitted is 5.

Error 3207 Serious error during access to system file <n> error: <m>

Error 3300 Deviation error in axis <n>. Current deviation: <m> mm limit: <o> mm

Error 3301 Frequency error in axis <n>.

Error 3302 Cable error in axis <n>.

Error 3303 Short circuit of the control enabler in axis <n> (to acknowledge the error, briefly in-terrupt the 24-Volt power of the PIO)

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

An error has occured during access to a storage file (file extension .stg or .job).

Delete the file and try again.

Cause of the error Action

The specified machine axis cannot follow the set value.

Check the drive, the electrical equipment and the mechanics.

Cause of the error Action

The electronics of the position detector re-port a non-allowed position jump.

Check the encoder and the encoder cabling.

Cause of the error Action

The electronics of the position detector re-port conflicting position values.

Check the encoder and the encoder cabling.

Cause of the error Action

The monitor of the control enabling re-ports a short circuit between the control and the servo amplifier.

Check the cabling and correct the short cir-cuit.

Page 322: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

320

B

Error messages 3201 - 3304, continued

Error 3304 Error in the control enabling in axis <n>.

Cause of the error Action

When reading back the signal, the monitor of the control enable notes a difference between set value and actual value.

Check the enabling of all axes and the en-coder cabling. Correct the short circuit.

Page 323: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

321

B

Error messages 3305 - 3390

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3305 to 3390 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the correspondingaction, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by anglebrackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3305 Watchdog error on the PIO <n>

Error 3306 Erroneous encoder voltage of the PIO <n>

Error 3307 Erroneous switching voltage of the PIO <n>

Error 3308 Switch-on limit of the gantry correction in axis <n> exceeded

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

The control hardware is not being ad-dressed on the right timing pulse.

Check the voltages at the power supply and notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

The encoders are reporting an erroneousreference voltage to the control.

Check the encoder voltage and notify Ser-vice.

Cause of the error Action

The level of the switching voltage is under 14 volts.

Check the power supply and notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

It was found in the homing procedure that the squareness of the machine is so greatly exceeded that it can no longer be restored automatically.

Restore the squareness of the machine man-ually.

Page 324: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

322

B

Error messages 3305 - 3390, continued

Error 3309 Switch-off limit of the absolute gantry correction in axis <n> exceeded

Error 3310 Dynamic error in axis <n> at speed <m> mm/s

Error 3352 Undefined condition of the digital outputs (connectors X20, AP1 - AP8)

Error 3353 There is no sensor present to register the manual blank alignment (connector X11)

Error 3354 The machine already moved to the sensor for registering the manual blank align-ment

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

During operation it was found that the squareness of the machine is exceeded so greatly that the machine is endan-gered.

Check the settings of the two gantry axes X and P for dynamics and eliminate the devia-tions.

Cause of the error Action

A speed jump was found during the mo-tion.

Notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

When reading back the signals, the moni-tor of the digital output signals notes a dif-ference between set value and actual value.

Check the cabling and notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

The control cannot recognize a sensor at the provided input.

Check the cabling and sensor.

Cause of the error Action

The sensor is reporting a contact to the control at a time when no contact is ex-pected.

Check the cabling, and the valence and set-tings of the sensor.

Page 325: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

323

B

Error messages 3305 - 3390, continued

Error 3357 Unknown hardware type

Error 3390 COM<n>: The hardware has determined a break condition.

Cause of the error Action

The process cards installed in the control are not supported by the software.

Notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

A BREAK signal was transmitted.

Page 326: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

324

B

Error messages 3391 - 3404

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3391 to 3404 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the corresponding action, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by angle brackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3391 COM<n>: The hardware determined a framing error.

Error 3392 COM<n>: A input/output error occurred during communication with the device.

Error 3393 COM<n>: The requested operating mode is not supported.

Error 3394 COM<n>: A buffer overflow has occurred. The following character is faulty.

Error 3395 COM<n>: An input error has occurred. The cause of the error is either not enough memory in the receive buffer or after the end-of-file character (EOF) a character has been received.

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

A framing error has been detected during serial transmission.

Change the equipment setting.

Cause of the error Action

An I/O error has been detected during se-rial transmission.

Change the equipment setting.

Cause of the error Action

Wrong device. Change the equipment setting.

Cause of the error Action

A character is not read in time by the hard-ware.

Change the equipment setting.

Reduce the baud rate.

Cause of the error Action

During the serial transfer the Windows in-ternal receive queue has been exceeded.

Change the setting of the serial device driver (Windows).

Page 327: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

325

B

Error messages 3391 - 3404, continued

Error 3396 COM<n>: A parity error has occurred.

Error 3397 COM<n>: Due to a send buffer overflow a faulty character transmission has oc-curred.

Error 3398 COM<n>: Error while opening the interface.

Error 3400 COM<n>: The connection to the ACOM server could not be established. Error num-ber =<n>

Error 3401 COM<n>: <m> successfully installed

Error 3402 Error <n>: Time base error, no answer

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

A parity error has been detected during serial transmission.

Change the equipment setting.

Cause of the error Action

During the serial transfer the Windows in-ternal send queue has been exceeded.

Change the setting of the serial device driver (Windows).

Cause of the error Action

The connection to the ACOM sever could not be established.

Start the ACOM server.

Cause of the error Action

not used -

Cause of the error Action

not used

Cause of the error Action

The time monitoring has been exceeded. Change the equipment setting.

Increase the time monitoring.

Page 328: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

326

B

Error messages 3391 - 3404, continued

Error 3403 Error <n>: Error while generating the file <m>. System error code = <o>

Error 3404 Error <n>: Error while opening the file <m>. Exception code = <o>

Cause of the error Action

Memory resp. system error. Notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

The desired file is not present resp. can-not be read.

Check the file name resp. the file.

Page 329: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

327

B

Error messages 3405 - 3418

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3405 to 3418 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the correspondingaction, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by anglebrackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3405 Error COM<n>: System option missing

Error 3406 Error COM<n>: Device unknown

Error 3407 Internal error when sending data. Error number = <n>

Error 3408 Internal error when sending commands. Error number = <n>

Error 3411 Error (UDL): Error when generating the local UDL directory. System error code = <n>

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

The system configuration does not con-tain the interface for a device that was se-lected in the constants, or the device setting in the constants is incorrect.

Install the selected interface or change the equipment setting.

Cause of the error Action

Incorrect equipment setting in the con-stants.

Change the equipment setting.

Cause of the error Action

An internal error occurred when sending data.

Notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

The local UDL directory is not present. Create a directory in the file manager. Data source type = UDL connection.

Page 330: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

328

B

Error messages 3405 - 3418, continued

Error 3412 UDL: Message from host. <n>

Error 3413 Error (UDL): Wrong data format in file <n>

Error 3414 Error (XONOFF): Wrong data format in file <n>

Error 3415 Error <n>: Control received an incomplete telegram.

Error 3416 <n> reports error: <m>

Error 3417 Device not present

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

Message from the UDL host computer. Acknowledge the message.

Cause of the error Action

Internal protocol error. Notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

Internal protocol error. Notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

The control received an incomplete tele-gram from an external device.

Check the external device.

Check the connection.

Cause of the error Action

Error message from an external device. This message is only displayed by the control.

See manual for the particular external device.

Cause of the error Action

An attempt was made to access an avail-able device that is not selected in the con-stants.

Select the desired external device in the con-stants.

Page 331: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

329

B

Error messages 3405 - 3418, continued

Error 3418 Error <n>: Control received an incomplete telegram.

Cause of the error Action

The control received a telegram from an external device whose content cannot be interpreted or is erroneous. That can oc-cur for example due to disturbances in the connection.

Check the connection.

Check the external device.

Page 332: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

330

B

Error messages 3419 - 3510

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3419 to 3510 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the corresponding action, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by angle brackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3419 Error <n>: Recovery time has expired.

Error 3500 Control panel no longer responding

Error 3501 Fatal error Motion stop triggered

Error 3502 Emergency power off sequence interrupted!

Error 3503 Real-time kernel error <n>

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

Message from the dot-matrix printer See manual of the dot-matrix printer.

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

The emergency power off sequence of the machine was interrupted.

Eliminate the reason for the interruption.

Cause of the error Action

Page 333: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

331

B

Error messages 3419 - 3510, continued

Error 3504 +<n> axis has reached software limit switch

Error 3505 -<n> axis has reached the software limit switch

Error 3506 Target positioning error of the axis: <n>

Error 3507 Application already running

Error 3508 The reference sequence is not clear! Correct reference sequence.

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

An attempt was made to override the pos-itive software limit switch of the displayed axis.

Move the tool in the contrary direction to the position of the limit switch.

If necessary, correct the settings of the working areas and limit switch values.

Cause of the error Action

An attempt was made to override the neg-ative software limit switch of the displayed axis.

Move the tool in the contrary direction to the position of the limit switch.

If necessary, correct the settings of the working areas and limit switch values.

Cause of the error Action

When positioning the machine, for exam-ple when moving to the machine home po-sition, it was determined that the intended destination position is outside of the limit switch.

Check the target position (machine con-stants, startup) and correct if necessary.

Also check the working areas and limit switches if necessary.

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Page 334: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

332

B

Error messages 3419 - 3510, continued

Error 3509 Interpolation: V setting of the control asynchronous!

Error 3510 Version conflict with the VDL file. MC will end. Please notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

The axis is not control enabled at present. Check the axis for errors.

Check the control enable signal on the drive.

Cause of the error Action

Version conflict between VDL file and MC software.

Notify Service.

Page 335: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

333

B

Error messages 3511 - 3570

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3511 to 3570 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the correspondingaction, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by anglebrackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3511 Timers & counters: Non-valid flag identification <n>

Error 3512 Error when loading the component <n>. Error code = <m>

Error 3513 Angle range of the rotating aggregate exceeded!

Error 3550 <n> Constant <m> (<o>) could not be written

Error 3561 Non-valid PIO number in the definition of the i/o channel. Constants: <n>, #<m>

Error 3562 Non-valid axis number in the definition of the i/o channel. Constants: <n>, #<m>

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Page 336: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

334

B

Error messages 3511 - 3570, continued

Error 3563 Multiple allocation of an I/O channel. Constants: <n>, #<m>

Error 3564 Non-valid sensors for the automatic homing. Constants: <n>, #<m>

Error 3565 Different emergency braking times for the gantry and guide axes. Constants: <n>, #<m>

Error 3566 Different time constants for the first order filter element of the gantry and guide axes. Constants: <n>, #<m>

Error 3567 Non-valid acceleration; the setting value <n> mm/s will be used. Constant: <m>, #<o>

Error 3568 Non-valid traversing sequence of the automatic reference. Constant: <n>, #<m>

Error 3569 Non-valid clock rate; setting value <n> ms will be used. Constant: <m>, #<o>

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

The value entered in the constants cannot be used.

Enter the acceleration intended for this axis.

Cause of the error Action

The sequence in which the axes are to be referenced is not possible.

Correct the traversing sequence.

Cause of the error Action

The clock rate set in the constants is not possible.

Select a valid clock rate (0.25 ms, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms).

Page 337: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

335

B

Error messages 3511 - 3570, continued

Error 3570 Non-valid cadence of the D/A output constant: <n>, #<m>

Cause of the error Action

The timing for the D/A output set in the constant is not possible.

Select a valid clock rate (0 ms, 0.25 ms, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms).

Page 338: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

336

B

Error messages 3571 - 3604

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3571 to 3604 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the corresponding action, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by angle brackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3571 Non-valid clocked interpolation; setting value <n> ms will be used. Constant: <m>, #<o>

Error 3572 The specified speed is higher than one of the axis speeds. Constants: <n>, #<m> and <o>, #<p>

Error 3573 The constant file <n> is not present

Error 3574 Missing constants (only <n> of <m> constants present)

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

The ratio of regulated to clocked interpola-tion set in the constants is not possible.

Enter a valid ratio of regulated to clocked in-terpolation (1 ... 4).

Cause of the error Action

The speed set as the maximum machine speed cannot be attained with the mea-sured axis speeds.

Reduce the maximum speed of the machine and raise the axis speed.

Cause of the error Action

The specified file is not present or cannot be opened.

Install a valid constant file.

Cause of the error Action

The specified file is not complete. Install a valid constant file with all constants.

Page 339: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

337

B

Error messages 3571 - 3604, continued

Error 3575 Undefined axis type. Please enter axis type and axis designation. Constant: <n>, <m> and <o>

Error 3600 Command not executed because the machine is still running. Press the 'STOP' key!

Error 3601 The command requires that the machine be at an absolute standstill. Repeat the command when the machine is stationary!

Error 3602 The requested task requires that the machine be referenced. Perform homing proce-dure!

Error 3603 Command refused because another function is running at present. End function!

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

An undefined axis type was selected. Select a valid axis type.

Cause of the error Action

A new function was selected, although the machine is still in the starting state.

Press the 'STOP' key!

Re-select the function.

Cause of the error Action

A new function was selected, although the machine is still moving.

Press the 'STOP' key, if this has not yet been done.

Wait a short time for the machine to come to a stop.

Re-select the function.

Cause of the error Action

The machine is to be moved, although this has not yet been referenced.

Perform a homing procedure.

Select the desired function again and wait.

Then re-select the function.

Cause of the error Action

A new function was selected before the currently running function was ended.

End the currently executing function or cancel it.

Then select a new function.

Page 340: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

338

B

Error messages 3571 - 3604, continued

Error 3604 Unknown command

Cause of the error Action

Page 341: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

339

B

Error messages 3605 - 3707

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3605 to 3707 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the correspondingaction, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by anglebrackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3605 Turn on the 24-Volt power

Error 3606 The selected function is not active.

Error 3607 The command list cannot be executed because the job list is overfilled.

Error 3608 The operating mode is not manual control

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

The switching voltage has not been acti-vated yet, or was turned off because of an error (e.g. gantry error, hardware limit switch reached).

Turn the switching voltage on from the keyboard.

Correct any errors.

Cause of the error Action

A function is supposed to be deactivated, but it was not even being executed (inter-nal error).

Choose another function to check if the func-tion that is to be deactivated really is not ac-tive.

Cause of the error Action

Serious internal error that has cause an overflow of the job list.

Restart the control.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

Internal error message that cannot appear at this time.

No other action is necessary.

Page 342: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

340

B

Error messages 3605 - 3707, continued

Error 3700 The ACS values for the positioning motion could not be set.

Error 3701 Axis simulation for <n> active!

Error 3702 The file <n> could not be loaded!

Error 3703 The file <n> could not be written to! Error number <m>. <o>

Error 3704 The file <n> could not be read! Error number <m>. <o>

Error 3705 Serious error during saving of system data (global)

Error 3706 Serious error during saving of system data (user)

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

The specified file could not be loaded. Notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

The specified file could not be written to. Notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

The specified file could not be read. Notify Service.

Cause of the error Action

An error occured during the saving of data to the registry file (section 'Local Machine' ) or to an INI file.

Try again.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Cause of the error Action

An error occured during the saving of data to the registry file (section 'User') or in an INI file.

Try again.

Notify Service if the problem occurs again.

Page 343: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

341

B

Error messages 3605 - 3707, continued

Error 3707 Station <n> download failed

Cause of the error Action

Page 344: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

342

B

Error messages 3708 - 3721

Introduction All of the error messages used with numbers from 3708 to 3721 are listed. The listing shows the error number, the error name, the cause of the display and the corresponding action, if necessary.

Wildcards The designation of the error message can include wildcards, which are replaced on the control by generated letters, texts or numbers. These wildcards are identified by angle brackets.Example: 'Error when opening the program <n>.'In this case, <n> stands for the name of the program that is to be opened.

Error 3708 Station <n> download timeout

Error 3709 Function could not be sent!

Error 3710 No station is selected!

Error 3711 No carriage is selected!

Error 3712 Station <n> download successful

Error 3713 Non-valid axis selection; startup has been canceled

continued on the next page

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

No station is selected! Select a station.

Cause of the error Action

No carriage is selected! Select a carriage.

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

A non-existent axis is supposed to be measured.

Page 345: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

343

B

Error messages 3708 - 3721, continued

Error 3714 Non-valid measurement speed; startup has been canceled

Error 3715 Start-up has been canceled (error code <n>)

Error 3717 The regulator reports an error; start-up has been canceled

Error 3718 Duplicate station constant file (<n>) for AMAD configuration

Error 3719 Missing station constant file for AMAD configuration

Error 3720 Non-valid guide axis allocation (<n>) for axis <m>.

Error 3721 The file <n> could not be read!

Cause of the error Action

The axis is not moving; axis simulation is active.

Check the axis and servo and turn off axis simulation.

Cause of the error Action

Internal error: Non-valid pointer or error in stepping mechanism.

Cause of the error Action

Cause of the error Action

Non-valid AMAD configuration. Check the constants.

Cause of the error Action

Non-valid AMAD configuration. Check the constants.

Cause of the error Action

Non-valid allocation of a gantry axis to a guide axis.

Check the constants.

Cause of the error Action

The file does not exist or has been opened by another program.

Check whether the file exists and close all other programs.

Page 346: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Messages

89.01.005500000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

344

B

Page 347: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

89.01.005501000.400.388-GB

Index

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

345

inde

Symbols'Alt' key, 31'Ctrl' key, 31'Del' key, 31'Help' key, 31'Ins' key, 31'Rapid' key, 35'RUN' key, 36'Select' key, 34, 38'Shift' key, 30'STOP' key, 36'Tab' key, 31

Numerics24 Volt Power shutoff, 7324-Volt, turning on the 24-Volt power, 80

AAbsolute programming, 169Accident prevention, 19Actual speed

Display, 42Additional panel, 37Administration of the file system, 147Admissible applications, 17Align blank, 89Align blank manually, 91

with two points, 97Align workpiece manually, 91

with two points, 97Aligning the blank automatically, 94Alphanumeric block, 30Application menu bar, 41, 44Applications, 17Auto blank alignment, 94Automatic, 51Automatic blank alignment, 94Automatic mode

Fundamentals, 196Switching the program display, 197

Automatic section, 51Automatic torch height control, 214Auxiliary equipment, turning on auxiliary equipment, 80Auxiliary function, 170Auxiliary functions, 167Availability of functions, 61

BBackspace, 31Backspace key, 31Blank alignment, 89Blank preparation, 126Blank rotation, 199Boards, 19Bridge, 203

CCalling the Help function, 72Calling the part program, 67Calling the stored part program, 67Carriage, 51

clamped, 217Motor carriage, 217

Carriage clamping, 217Clamping statuses, 219Manual clamping, 221

Carriage section, 51Carriages, 217Case, 23Caution, 15Change technology parameter, 186Changing a technology parameter, 186Check list, 63Clamped carriage, 217Clamping status, 219

Free, 219Like, 219Lock, 219Mirror, 219

Clamping the carriages, 217Close, 44Communication with the control, 56Context-sensitive help, 72Continuing a part program, 70Continuing a program, 70Continuing an interrupted program, 70Continuing interrupted part programs, 209Continuing part programs after interruption, 209Control elements, 26Control modifications, 17Coordinate display

Switching, 114Coordinate system, 102, 167Copy file, 157Copying a file, 157

Index

Page 348: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Index

89.01.005501000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

346

inde

Creating a new file, 155Creep speed

Creep speed for height control, 215Current speed

Display, 42Cursor keys, 30Cut file, 158Cutting a file, 158Cutting data, 52

DDamage, 19Danger, 15Danger warnings, 18Data, 51Data section, 51, 145Deactivate working areas, 125Deactivation of the working areas, 125DEFINE.TEC, 184Defining a strap bridge, 203Defining fix points, 127Delete file, 153Deleting a file, 153Deleting lines in program code, 179Diagnosis, 52Diagnosis section, 52Dialog box, 56Digitizing graphical patterns, 129Direction indicator, 42Display of the technology data, 183

EEdit, 44Editing programs, 171EIA, 170Electrical setup, 19Emergency measures, 20EMERGENCY POWER OFF, 20, 30Enlargement of segments in the part program editor, 180Enter, 31Enter key, 31Enter parameters, 201Environmental conditions, 17Error message, 56

Error messagesErrors 3001 - 3008, 294Errors 3009 - 3029, 296Errors 3031 - 3048, 298Errors 3049 - 3058, 300Errors 3059 - 3092, 302Errors 3093 - 3102, 307Errors 3103 - 3113, 309Errors 3114 - 3128, 312Errors 3129 - 3200, 315Errors 3201 - 3304, 318Errors 3305 - 3390, 321Errors 3391 - 3404, 324Errors 3405 - 3418, 327Errors 3419 - 3510, 330Errors 3511 - 3570, 333Errors 3571 - 3604, 336Errors 3605 - 3707, 339Errors 3708 - 3721, 342

ESSI, 170Execute file, 160Execute part programs, 195Executing part programs, 206Executing the teach trace procedure, 139Executing the trace procedure, 134Execution of a file, 160Explorer, 147Extended function menu, 28Extended function menu key, 28Extras, 47

FF key, 27Feed, 132, 137, 199Feed potentiometer, 35Feed rate display, 42File, 44File manager, 147

Copying a file, 157Creating a new file, 155Cutting a file, 158Execute file, 160List view, 149Pasting a file, 159Reread, 149Structure, 148Symbol view, 148Tree view, 148Update, 149

File, creating a new file, 155Fire of the control, 20Fix point, 109, 120Flashing symbol field, 41Formats of part programs, 170Function, 45Function colour, 61Function key, 27, 41Function menu, 41Functional symbol, 41

Page 349: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Index

89.01.005501000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

347

indexinde

Fundamentals of automatic mode, 196

GG code, 170Gas supply, turning on the gas supply, 80General safety instructions, 15General safety precautions, 17Generally available process functions, 213Go to, 178Grounded measuring equipment, 19

HHandrad, 32Handwheel, 32Handwheel movement, 117Hardware limit switches, 105Height control

automatic, 214Help, 47, 72Homing procedure, 64

Automatic, 84no reference switch, 88

IIncremental programming, 169Information box, 57Initial value, 192Input block, 29Input box, 59Installation, 64, 77Interpretation data, 184Interrupt part programs, 209Interrupting a part program, 70Interrupting a program, 70Interrupting a running program, 70Interrupting part programs, 209

JJoystick, 35Joystick controller, 35

KKerf, 132, 199Key 'Alt', 31Key 'Ctrl', 31Key 'Del', 31Key 'Help', 31Key 'Ins', 31Key 'Master up', 34Key 'Shift', 30Key 'Tab', 31Key functions, 61Key Level back, 27Knowledge of the machine, 17

LLatch mode, 115Lead-in angle, 137Lead-in length, 137Lead-in type, 137Lead-out, 137Lead-out angle, 137Lead-out length, 137Level back key, 27Limit switches, 104Line tracing system, 129Load technology record, 185Logical clamping, 217

MM code, 170Machine area, 104Machine construction, 218Machine home, 104Machine home point, 125Machine operating instructions, 17Machine position, 125Machine zero point, 102, 104, 105Main display, 41Main switch, turning on the main switch, 80Malfunctions, 21Manual blank alignment

with two points, 97Manual clamping

Free, 219Like, 219Lock, 219Mirror, 219

Manual clamping of a carriage, 221Manual mode, 51, 111

Defining fix points, 127Handwheel, 117Latch, 115Move to target point, 122Move to working area home, 121Moving to the fix point, 120Positioning motion, 119Principles, 113Selecting axes, 118Tip mode, 116

Manual mode with handwheel, 117Manual section, 51Master up, 34, 216Measures from the machine manual, 79Mechanical clamping, 217Mechanical limit switches, 105

Page 350: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Index

89.01.005501000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

348

inde

MenuEdit, 44Extras, 47File, 44Function, 45Help, 47Section, 44View, 46

Menu bar, 44Menu operation, 44Min. point-to-point distance, 137Motion travel, 119Motor carriage, 217Move to reference points, 82

Establish reference point without reference switches, 88Manual reference point movement, 86Reference points, 83

Move to target point, 122Move to the machine home point, 125Move to working area home, 121Moving to reference points

Automatic homing procedure, 84Moving to the fix point, 120MPG editor, 162

NNavigation display, 41Numeric block, 30

OOnline help, 72On-screen timers and counters, 189

Resetting a counter/timer, 192Setting a new limit, 193

Open part program in the automatic section, 207Open TDF file, 185Opening the control, 19Operating example, 63Operator Manual, 13Operator panel, 23Optical tracing system, 129Oxy fuel process, 223

Main view, 224

PParameter

Blank rotation, 199Feed, 199Kerf, 199Program rotation, 200Repetitions, 200

Parameter entry in teach trace mode, 137Parameter entry in trace mode, 132Parameters, 199

Part program editor, 162Basics, 164Copy and paste, 176Cut and paste, 177Deleting lines in program code, 179Enlargement of segments, 180Find, 172Formats, 162Functions, 171Go to, 178Graphic, 165Navigating, line-by-line, 178Program code, 165Replace, 174Replace all, 174Save, 182Structure, 165Zoom, 180

Part programs, 167Paste file, 159Pasting a file, 159Path information, 167, 170Plasma process, 226

Main view, 227Plate alignment, 89Plugged connections, 19Position moves

Move to the machine home point, 125Positioning motion, 119Positioning moves

Travel to the last program zero point, 124Preparatory tasks, 79Prepare part programs, 195Preparing the control, 77Preparing the system, 79Principles of manual mode, 113Process, 51

Automatic torch height control, 214Oxy fuel, 223Plasma, 226Startup all stations, 216

Process section, 51Processes

Creep speed for height control, 215Generally available functions, 213

Produce strap bridge, 208

Producing a strap bridge, 208Program call, 67Program code

Navigating, line-by-line, 178Program code, copy, 176Program code, cut, 177Program code, paste, 176, 177Program execution, 195, 206Program formats, 169, 170Program preparation, 195

Enter parameters, 201Select program options, 202

Program rotation, 200

Page 351: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Index

89.01.005501000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

349

indexinde

Program starting point, 110

QQuick operation, 63

RRapid key, 35Recording several closed contours, 143Reference Manual, 75Reference manual, 63Reference point in teach trace mode, 139Reference point movement

Manual, 86Regulations, 17Rename file, 151Renaming a file, 151Repetitions, 200Reread, 149Resetting a counter/timer, 192Reverse direction, 210Reverse processing direction, 210Reverse travel direction, 210RUN key, 36, 41RUN/STOP display, 42

SSafety, 15Safety Instructions

Accident prevention, 19Safety instructions, 15

Danger warnings, 18Emergency measures, 20Malfunctions, 21

Safety precautionsGeneral safety precautions, 17

Safety regulations, 17Save TDF file, 188Save technology record, 188Saving a technology record, 188Saving part programs, 182Screen block, 27Screen description, 40Screen views, 53Searching in program code, 172Section, 44

Automatic mode, 51Data, 51Diagnosis, 52Manual mode, 51, 111Options, 52Process, 51Startup, 52Station, 51Technology data, 52

Section colour, 50Section key, 43

Section keys, 28Section menu, 43Sections, 50

Data, 145Sections of the control operation, 50Select, 34, 38Select program options, 202Selecting axes, 118Selecting the axes, 67Selecting the axis, 67Selection box, 58Selection of the axes, 118Set limit, 193Set speed

Display, 42Software limit switches, 105Special characters, 30Special keys, 34, 38Specifc safety instructions, 15Start-up, 77Startup, 52Startup all stations, 216Startup section, 52Station block, 33Station clamping, 221Stations keys, 34, 38Status bar, 41Status line, 184Status message, 57Status messages

Status message 2001 - 2009, 288Status message 2010 - 2019, 290

STOP key, 36Strap bridge, 203

defining, 203Strap bridge parameters, 203Structure of the technology data display, 184Sum up, 216Switch the coordinate display, 114Switching off the 24 Volt Power, 73Switching off the system, 19Switching on the 24 Volt Power, 64Switching the program display, 197Symbol field, 41Symbols

Automatic section, 242Carriage section, 271Data section, 233Manual mode section, 253Process section, 274Startup section, 282Technology data section, 280

System, turning on the system, 80

TTarget point motion, 119TDF file, 183, 184Teach Trace, 129Teach trace, 136

Page 352: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Index

89.01.005501000.400.388-GB

Operating instructions - Preliminary information VISION 55

350

inde

Teach trace modeParameter entry, 137Program zero, 139Recording several closed contours, 143Reference point, 139Status display, 139Teach trace procedure, execute, 139

Technology data display, 183Structure, 184

Technology data section, 52Technology parameter, 183Technology record, 183Technology records, 34Timers & Counters, 189Tip mode, 116Trace, 129, 131Trace mode

Executing the trace procedure, 134Parameter entry, 132

Tracing graphical patterns, 129Tracing system, 129Tracing type, 137Trailed carriage, 217Travel to position, 122Travel to the last program zero point, 124Traverse block, 35Turning off the working areas, 125Turning on the system and 24-Volt power, 80

UUpdate, 149Use of the control, 17

VView, 46Views, 53

Explorer, 53Graphic, 54Standard, 53Table, 54Tree, 55

Voltage, 19

WWarning, 15Working area home, 108, 121Working areas, 107Working steps, 63Workpiece preparation, 126Works under voltage, 19

ZZoom, 180

Page 353: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06
Page 354: 0558006251_Vision_55_Setup 04-06

Customer / Technical Support(843)-664-4405

(800) ESAB-123 (372-2123)

ESAB Welding and Cutting ProductsPO Box 100545 Ebenezer Rd

Florence, SC 29501-0545http://www.esab.com

http://www.esabcutting.com

ESAB Cutting Systems - Canada6010 Tomken Road

Mississauga, Ontario Canada L5T 1X9Phone: (905) 670-0220

Fax: (905) 670-4879

ESAB-Cutting Systems GmbHRobert-Bosch-Strasse 20

Postfach 1128D-61184 Karben 1

Phone 011-49-6039-400Fax 011-49-6039-403-02

http://www.esab.com

Printed in U.S.A.